Blog

  • Definition and Function of Centrifuge

    Definition and Function of Centrifuge

    When you are in the laboratory, you must have tried the activity of separating a solution into its constituent substances. Separation of the solution of these substances can be done using a tool called a centrifuge. Many still need to understand the meaning and function of a centrifuge and how it works.

    The centrifuge works as a means of separating several substances in one solution. The separation process is by the deposition method. This tool is designed to facilitate the deposition process in the separation of substances with a rotating machine mechanism. The rotation is based on the centrifugal force that affects the gravitational force.

    Definition and Function of Centrifuge

    The centrifuge can be used for biochemical research in the laboratory. For example, to separate human blood cells, both white and red blood cells. Or also beneficial for the separation of solutions of other substances. Please feel free to listen to the discussion below to learn about the meaning and function of the centrifuge.

    A. What is a Centrifuge?

    The meaning and function of a centrifuge which has the understanding that a centrifuge is a tool or machine made to separate a particular substance that is in solution. This tool is often found in research and health laboratories. The centrifuge was first discovered by a foreign scientist named Benjamin Robins around the 1700s.

    The centrifuge works by using electric power, which can move the components inside. The rotor is the main component that can be used to separate a solution. The rotor will produce mechanical motion by rotating movement with a certain speed according to the user’s needs.

    B. Centrifuge Function

    Centrifuge Function

    The centrifuge was made with the primary purpose of helping humans work in separating various types of substance solutions in the field of laboratory research. In addition, the centrifuge also has several derivative functions that you can see as follows:

    1. As a separator of the content of substances in a particular solution. Both chemical and biological substances.
    2. To separate red blood cells from white blood cells to be taken plasma cells.
    3. Separating urine and blood to analyze or diagnose a person’s illness.
    4. Can be used to separate a food content.
      5. Can be used to purify a cell.
      6. Can be used for the separation process in animal milk, which separates the fat and milk content.

    C. Types of Centrifuge

    After knowing the function of the centrifuge, let’s also know the types. In its development, the centrifuge is made into several substance separators. These types differ in their respective forms and uses. The following are the types of centrifuges that you need to know:

    1. General Purpose Centrifuge

    General-Purpose-Centrifuge

    This type of centrifuge is a centrifuge that is often used for various needs in the laboratory, which has the usual shape and can be put on the table. This type of centrifuge has a speed range of 0 to 3000 rpm. Can accommodate 5 to 100 ml solution samples per rotation.

    2. Microcentrifuge

    Microcentrifuge

    A microcentrifuge is a helpful machine for separating specific solutions or special microtubes. This machine has a higher speed than the general-purpose centrifuge. Because of its smaller size, it can only accommodate a microtube of about 0.5 to 2.0 ml.

    3. Specialty Centrifuge

    This specialty centrifuge is a machine only used for more special substance separation needs. For example, it is used for microhematocrit to measure pack cell hematocrit. And it can also be used for blood bank, which is serologic separation in tubes.

    4. Ultra-refrigerated centrifuge

    Ultra refrigerated centrifuge

    Ultra and refrigerated centrifuge is one machine often used for research in biochemistry laboratories. This type of tool differs from some previous classes, where the speed is higher, around 50 thousand to 20 thousand rotations per minute. The advantage of this tool is that it is equipped with a sample cooler so that the temperature conditions are appropriately maintained.

    D. Centrifuge Component

    The centrifuge has several components that are designed into a single unit. There are main components and complementary components in it. To find out, let’s look at the components of the centrifuge as follows:

    1. Rotor

    The rotor is the main component of driving the centrifuge, which has a way of working that can rotate at a certain speed. The speed depends on the type of centrifuge used. The rotor itself has two types, namely the fixed rotor and the swing-out rotor, which have different types of rotation.

    2. Drive Shaft

    The drive shaft is another component found in the centrifuge. You can use it as a support for the rotor components. The drive shaft is connected to other parts, namely the motor.

    3. Motor

    The motor is a supporting component in the centrifuge. The motor is useful for driving the function of the rotor connected to the drive shaft. So that this motor can move the parts in the centrifuge, it flows to the power button connected to electricity.

    4. Centrifuge Tube

    The centrifuge tube is one of the components useful for placing samples of certain substances for particle separation. This tube is made slightly concave and pointed at the bottom so that the sample particles can settle to the bottom.

    E. How to Use Centrifuge

    How to Use Centrifuge

    As with laboratory equipment, there must be a good and correct way of using it. Likewise, centrifuges have procedures for use, so they are not mistaken. So that the samples that are successfully processed can be analyzed further. Here’s how to use a centrifuge:

    1. First, prepare all the tools and sample materials.
    2. Be sure to plug in the mains so the centrifuge can run.
    3. The sample to be processed must be put in a glass tube and can be put into a centrifuge machine
    4. Before starting, ensure the cover on the centrifuge can be tightly closed and locked.
    5. Set the speed by setting it on the rpm button, and set the required time by setting it on the timer button.
    6. Press the central button to run the centrifuge.
    7. When finished, you can press the button to stop or open the centrifuge cover.
    8. Then, you can remove all the sample tubes that have been successfully processed.

    Conclusion

    That’s a discussion about the meaning and function of the centrifuge that you can know. The centrifuge is very helpful in various laboratory studies to separate the content of certain substances.

  • What Triggers Economic Recession: Definition, Causes, and Impact on Society

    What Triggers Economic Recession: Definition, Causes, and Impact on Society

    In measuring the development and progress of a country, of course the main reference or indicator is how much economic growth is.

    Meanwhile, the level of economic growth can be seen from the value of the Gross Domestic Product (GDP) in the country.

    If the GDP is low and continues to decline for months, it can trigger an economic recession . What is an economic recession?

    Understanding Economic Recession

    A recession or slump is a condition marked by a decline in the wheels of the economy due to the weakening of the value of Gross Domestic Product (GDP) for six consecutive months in the same year.

    A recession is marked by a significant decline in economic activity that lasts for several months. An economic recession can also be defined as a major slowdown or contraction in economic activity.

    Recession is marked by the value of economic growth reaching 0% and can even reach minus in its worst condition. This condition can certainly disrupt the economic system and threaten the survival of the community.

    A recession can be characterized by high unemployment , falling retail sales, and a prolonged contraction in manufacturing earnings.

    Characteristics of an Economic Recession

    This economic disaster certainly has certain characteristics, the following are the characteristics:

    1. Gross Domestic Product (GDP) continues to decline.
    2. The real income of the people is decreasing.
    3. The decline in sales and manufacturing production , many goods are not sold and piled up in factories.
    4. The unemployment rate is getting higher, while there are fewer jobs.
    5. People’s purchasing power or consumption is low.
    6. Economic growth has slumped for two consecutive quarters.

    Causes of the Economic Recession

    This decline in economic conditions and GDP is certainly caused by many factors, including:

    1. Inflation

    Inflation is a condition in which the price of goods increases continuously. This is actually not a bad thing, but if this price increase occurs excessively or significantly, it will certainly have an impact on society and cause a recession.

    If the price of goods for public needs continues to soar to the point where people are unable to carry out consumption activities and cannot fulfill their needs, then this can be a disaster for the country.

    2. Deflation

    The opposite of inflation, deflation is a condition in which the price of goods continues to experience a significant decline. This will have a similar impact, because if production prices fall, wages will also fall and suppress market price stability.

    Deflation has more of an impact on business owners. If this condition continues, many companies will not be able to continue their business and lead to bankruptcy. This will certainly have an impact on the destruction of the economic system.

    3. Asset Bubble

    An asset bubble is a situation where the impact can be enormous. This condition occurs because there are many investors who are competing to buy shares when the value is high, and competing to sell them when the economy is in disarray.

    Another name for this situation is irrational excitement. This joy comes when investors make decisions to buy stocks and real estate when the economy is good. It’s that fun that inflates the stock market and residential assets.

    Until in the end the bubble burst because the economy was in a downturn, then they would destroy the market by selling all the assets they had. This then triggers a recession.

    4. Economic Shock

    This condition can be many things. Starting from a pile of individual debt, to companies. The more debt you have, the higher the repayment fee will be. In fact, this can get to the point where the debtor is unable to pay off the debt.

    Economic shocks can also occur due to natural disasters , political and social instability, terrorism , war , or in times of pandemics such as those that have occurred since 2020 until now.

    5. High Interest Rates

    High interest rates can also cause prolonged economic problems . A high nominal can indeed protect the value of the currency, but it can also burden the debtor and cause credit faltering. If this problem occurs continuously, it is not surprising that many banks close and collapse.

    6. Loss of Investor Confidence

    In economic development, investment is the key. Therefore, it is necessary to have a conducive and safe climate so that investors are interested and believe in pouring their money.

    If many investors lose confidence and withdraw their investment, then the economy will be weak, production will decrease, unemployment will increase and of course the country will experience an economic recession.

    7. Imports are Bigger than Exports

    When countries bring in more of their basic needs from abroad and are not matched by sales of domestic products to foreign countries, this will trigger a recession.

    It is clear that the expenditure for obtaining imported goods is greater than the income from selling local products to foreign countries. This will of course lead to a deficit in the state budget.

    Impact of the Economic Recession

    The economic recession will certainly have a big impact on all. At least this impact will be grouped into 3 groups, namely:

    1. Government

    An economic recession can cause a reduction in the state budget that comes from taxes and non-taxes. This is because people’s income and property prices have decreased.

    Not only that, the recession also causes high unemployment rates. Of course, the government must find ways to open up the widest possible employment opportunities for those in need.

    Not surprisingly, this condition can make countries apply for loans to foreign banks and increase the amount of state debt.

    2. Company

    Recession is one aspect that can lead to business bankruptcy . When the company is not strong enough to face losses and economic problems that hit the market, the solution is to go out of business.

    Of course, that’s not a good way out. Because this causes massive layoffs that lead to low economic activity in the community due to poverty.

    3. Workers

    They are the worst affected in the event of a recession. Workers will be threatened with losing their jobs and having difficulty meeting their daily needs. If their income is nil due to layoffs, then the impact will no longer only be on the economy, but will also spread to social problems and so on.

    Example of an Economic Recession

    The world has changed dramatically in the three months since our last update of the World Economic Outlook in January. A rare disaster, a coronavirus pandemic, has resulted in a tragically large number of human lives being lost. As countries implement necessary quarantines and social distancing practices to contain the pandemic, the world has been put in a Great Lockdown. The magnitude and speed of collapse in activity that has followed is unlike anything experienced in our lifetimes.

    source : imf.org

    Difference Between Recession and Economic Depression

    In addition to the economic recession that threatens the survival of the community, there is also the term economic depression. Here’s the difference:

    • Scale. The occurrence of a recession is usually limited to one country, while an economic depression affects the global economy. An economic depression is a much more severe condition of the economy and its effects are worse than a recession.
    • GDP levels. The level that marks the onset of a recession is that its GDP fell in the range of minus 0.3-5.1%. While depressed, its GDP was at minus 14.7%-38.1%.

    Period of time. A country is considered to be in a recession when its economy has deteriorated for 6 to 18 months in a row. In depression, the effects are much more severe and long lasting. The slump in economic conditions in the economic depression can last for more than 18 months.

  • The Branches and school of Philosophy

    The Branches and school of Philosophy

    What comes to your mind when you hear or see the word philosophy? In this advanced era, the word philosophy is certainly no stranger to our ears. Surely many of us have heard of or studied philosophy. For those of you who have heard the word, what comes to your mind when you see or read the word philosophy?

    Is it a science that studies abstract things? Or one of the majors in your college? Or maybe the subject you don’t like the most? Do any of you think that philosophy is a science that deals with love? Or are some of you aware that our thought process is also part of a philosophy?

    You need to understand that philosophy has become one of the sciences that is often underestimated, judged as something that is not clear, strange, and abstract if you do not understand it more deeply. If you have not studied philosophy in depth, then you will never like this one field of science.

    Because, if you understand it more deeply and study it properly, then you will find a “love” in philosophy. Well, below we will discuss the flow of philosophy in more depth along with the understanding and other matters related to philosophy. For those of you who want to learn it, read this article to the end.

    What is Philosophy?

    Philosophy is one of the words that comes from the word in English, namely “Philosophy”. The word comes from Greek which is divided into two words, namely “Philein” or “Philia”, and “Sophia”. So, what do these two words mean? So, both words have the word Philen or Philia which means love or love, while Sophia has the meaning of wisdom. In simple terms, philosophy has the meaning of loving wisdom or love of wisdom. A philosopher or thinker loves wisdom.

    Statue of Socrates in the Vatican Museums.
    Statue of Socrates in the Vatican Museums.

    Where people who love or like wisdom will be more careful in believing and accepting things that are not clearly sourced. They will try to keep asking questions until the answers they receive are enough to answer all their confusion and doubts. It could be said that their lives would feel much calmer. With their questions and their efforts to find answers, it can help them not to get too caught up in things that are not clear. This is in accordance with the characteristics of philosophy, namely radical, universal, and also systematic.

    Philosophy itself is universal, that means the thoughts that exist in the school of philosophy apply to everyone, without exception. Then philosophy has a radical characteristic, namely to dig something up to the root or source. Where a philosopher does not just stop at one or two questions, but their questions will continue to arise until there is no longer anything that makes them feel doubtful or confused. Then philosophy is systematic is all thoughts that arise or questions that arise until all answers are sequential and interconnected. In the end, you will find that the existing schools of philosophy are schools that are interconnected with each other.

    The second love you can get at the beginning of the emergence of philosophy. One of the positive emotions that exist in humans is admiration and philosophy arises from these positive emotions. Amazement ultimately brings a high curiosity about the things we admire. From that sense the questions arose to form a school in philosophy. As we know that philosophy does not only have one or two schools, but philosophy has various schools. Where these school arise because of the differences in the way we view the world and everything in it.

    Even in looking at the same thing, we may have a different point of view. Maybe you will see from the right side and other people will see from the left side. Then eventually some people will create a new view. Likewise with the flow in philosophy. Various kinds of flow, of course, is the point of view of the characters in seeing the world. This point of view can be based on how people experience life or the principles and beliefs they have.

    Of course, all of these things are based on a clear basis, found from curiosity and questions that arise from that sense. In the following, we will discuss the branches of philosophy and also the various schools of philosophy that you need to understand.

    The College of Athens (1509-1511) by Raffaello, featuring prominent Greek philosophers in a beautiful room setting inspired by works of Ancient Greek architecture
    The College of Athens (1509-1511) by Raffaello, featuring prominent Greek philosophers in a beautiful room setting inspired by works of Ancient Greek architecture

    Branches of Philosophy

    Below are some branches of philosophy, among others:

    a. Ontology

    Ontology or often referred to as metaphysics is a branch of philosophy that explains the nature of everything that exists and discusses the very basic or ultimate character of objects or realities that lie behind direct experience. Basically, ontology explains everything that exists, the questions that will be uncovered are unlimited, for example, what is the nature of space and time, matter, motion, and change? What is the origin of this universe? and other questions. In relation to education, the ontology of educational science discusses the nature of the substance and also the pattern of organization of the science of education.

    b. Epistemology

    Epistemology is a branch of philosophy that examines the origin, methods, structure, and validity of knowledge. The most basic question is what is knowing? What is the origin of our knowledge? How do we know that we have knowledge? How do we get knowledge? And other questions. Thus, epistemology discusses the nature of formal objects and also the material of educational science.

    c. Axiologists

    Axiology generally talks about the value and use of everything related to the moral principles of developing the use of knowledge obtained. For example, educational axiology discusses the nature of the value of the theoretical and practical functions of educational science.

    d. Logic

    Logic is a branch of philosophy that talks about the rules of thinking so that with these rules the right conclusions can be drawn. In other words, logic is a systematic study of rules to strengthen the premises or causes about the conclusions of these rules. So that we can use it to distinguish good arguments and bad arguments.

    Philosophy Schools

    The following are some of the schools that exist in philosophy:

    1. Idealism

    Idealism is a school that assumes that reality or reality is composed of soul and ideas. The term idealism comes from the word “idea” which means something that is present in the soul. This flow is a very important beginning for the development of human thinking. The basic thinking of this school was also explained by Plato. According to him, the most basic reality is an idea. While the reality that can be seen by humans is a shadow of the idea itself.

    Such thinking must view the visible reality as something that is not so important. They will only accept it if the reality is connected with ideas. Even so, this idealistic thought is the most acceptable thought by figures or philosophers, one of which is Descartes. He agreed that the element related to the soul is an element that is more important than a visible object.

    2. Rationalism

    The flow of rationalism is a school that puts forward style as the only reliable source of knowledge. For the characters, reason is the most important asset possessed by humans to acquire, discover, and test knowledge. They also assume that the mind has the ability to solve various kinds of problems that exist in life. All problems can be solved and solved using reason. The famous figure in the flow of rationalism is Rene Descartes. He has the nickname as the father of modern philosophy.

    The flow arose because of a question from him “What is the basic method that humans will use for reflection?” From these questions, he found reason as one of the most basic things that humans use to reflect on something. If the flow is pulled to the present, is it still relevant? Do you belong to the group of rationalists, who always use reason in solving all kinds of problems that arise in life? Or maybe you belong to another school?

    3. Empiricism

    This flow focuses more on the experience that a person has as a source of knowledge. The word empiricism comes from the Greek which means sensory experience or the experience of observation through the five senses. Empiricism is a school that is very contrary to rationalism. According to the characters in it, knowledge comes from experience. So that the five senses are the clearest and most certain primary source of reason. Everything that humans know depends on how they use their five senses, starting from hearing, seeing, touching what they have, and talking.

    Aristoteles
    Aristoteles

    The empiricist figures also reject the belief that humans have the nature of knowledge within themselves. According to this school, without experience, knowledge cannot be formed. In addition, this school was also formed by Francis Bacon and Thomas Hobbes with the view: All knowledge can be formed by combining what has been experienced by humans. Are you one of those people who believe in this flow? Where experience is something that can shape a person’s perspective so that it can affect how they behave and the personality that is formed from that experience.

    4. Dualism

    Dualism is a school which states that reality consists of two different and contradictory roots. Each root is unique and cannot be removed. So, there are some figures who say that this school is a combination of idealism and materialism, or a flow that combines the soul and body. The figure who formed this thought was Thomas Hyde. Where the basic thought is a substance and the mind is a different thing and both will complement each other to form a knowledge.

    5. Positivism

    This flow emerged in the 19th century. Where the basis of this thinking is based on knowledge that comes from what is known, certain, and the real thing. Positivism focuses on a fact that is real and excludes things beyond reality and unseen reality. This school is very close to empiricism, which both believe that knowledge is based on experience based on the senses. According to the characters in it, humans will never know anything more than what they see. Based on real facts, humans will not know anything behind these facts if they do not see them.

    What is Positivism, A Sociological Theory of Auguste Comte
    What is Positivism, A Sociological Theory of Auguste Comte

    The figure who created this school was Henri de Saint Simon, which was later developed by his student named August Comte. The basis of this thinking is to understand a knowledge that humans must draw causal relationships. Until the laws that make up that knowledge. In the process of seeking this, humans will find various kinds of facts that are evident in this knowledge.

    6. Realism

    Realism is a school that exists in science. According to this school, he takes issue with the object of human knowledge. Where realism views that the object of knowledge believed by humans is outside of the human itself, for example.

    a. Knowledge of trees
    b. Knowledge of animals
    c. Knowledge of the earth
    d. Knowledge of the city.

    All the examples mentioned above do not only exist in the mind of the human who observes them, but also exist by themselves and do not depend on the human soul.

    realism is divided into two groups, among others:

    1. Rational Realists

    This type of realism is divided into two groups, namely classical realism and religious realism. Both schools, both classical and religious, have their roots in Aristotle’s philosophy. However, there are fundamental differences between these two schools. Where the difference is that classical realism is usually directly from Aristotle’s view, while the flow of religious realism is not directly from Aristotle. He developed in the philosophy of Thomas Aquinas, a Christian philosopher who became known as Thomism. The views of both agree that the material world is real and exists outside the person who pays attention to it.

    Carlo Crivelli 007.jpg
    Thomas Aquinas

    Then, adherents of Thomism argue that the soul is one of the important things even though it is not real like the body. Therefore, this school also argues that the soul as well as the body was created by God. Thomism also assumes that knowledge is obtained through revelation, experience, and thinking. Adherents of the flow of religious realism argue that the harmony of the universe is God’s creation, so we need to study it.

    2.  Scientific Realism

    This Scientific Realism group is the development of natural science. Where the flow of natural realism has a skeptical and experimental nature. The school holds that the world around us is real, so one of the tasks of science is to investigate all the contents in it and this is not the task of philosophy. The task for philosophy is none other than the coordination of the concepts and discoveries of various sciences. According to this flow, nature has a permanent nature, indeed there will be changes, but the changes are directly in accordance with the laws of nature which are permanent and make the universe continue according to its regular arrangement.

  • 5 Things You Should Know About Sales

    5 Things You Should Know About Sales

    Business pals, hearing the word ” sales ” doesn’t sound familiar anymore, doesn’t it? Its vital role for the company makes the sales role as the spearhead of the company’s sales. Therefore, it is often easy for us to find job vacancies for sales positions . Unfortunately, many people actually underestimate this profession.

    Because, sales are often labeled as a job that only has sexy clothes or a slippery mouth. In fact, the sales function is not that simple, so what? Come on, see the following sinaumedia.com review, friend !

    Sales Definition

    Sales can be understood as part of selling activities, whether in the form of goods or services to buyers. Likewise, HubSpot also defines sales as the activity of selling goods or services.

    It can be seen, almost all companies do not have a sales team . The reason is that direct interaction with consumers makes sales performance have a direct impact on company sales. Therefore, the assumption that underestimates the position of sales, of course, is not right. Because, facing rejection outright and even insults is not easy for someone to accept, unless he has mental steel and resilience.

    Then, it is also important to know that in its movement, there are at least three elements behind the sales movement . First, by region or sales area. Namely, before selling the goods, the sales team will map the area first. After that, the team will get a map of which areas need the goods or services they sell.

    Second, based on the goods or services sold. In this case, the depth of understanding of the goods or services being sold will determine the results of the strategies drawn up. The reason is, the characteristics of the product to be sold will break down the market segmentation that will be targeted.

    Finally, the third, based on the target customer. Making the target customer as a reference in sales , will automatically determine the sales target area as well as complete the characteristics of the product to be sold.

     

    General Terms in Sales

    Sales as a sales activity, in business, gives rise to several general terms. Sinaumedia.com summarizes at least five general terms, including the following:

    1. Salesperson

    Salesperson in question is an individual who peddles a product in the sales transaction process. Therefore, in other terms, a salesperson is also called a salesman .

    Regarding his job, a salesperson sells products , goods or services to buyers. Where in doing so, the salesperson will suggest products or services that can meet the needs of buyers. Therefore, he must first find out what the buyer wants or needs, and to do so often requires a certain sales technique.

    On the other hand, in addition to the salesperson , he must be able to bring in new buyers, he must also be able to keep the buyers in order to continue to subscribe to the products he sells. That is why, the situation and needs of the company greatly affect the responsibilities and target buyers of the salesperson .

    2. Prospect

    Prospect, according to Krugman and Maurice, is defined as an opportunity that arises because of a person’s efforts to fulfill his needs as well as to gain profit . More specifically, prospects can also be translated as potential clients as ideal customers. That is, those who are not very interested in the products or services offered.

    In another understanding, prospects are also often considered as a way for a salesperson to approach prospective customers, either by making phone calls, social selling , or it could be email marketing . Now, after successfully conducting prospects to customers, the salesperson will enter the deal stage .

    sales team

    3. Deal

    Deal may be a more familiar term in the ears of many people, which is understood as a price agreement between the seller and the buyer. In the process, the deal will be classified into many levels. And, each company has different levels of deals depending on the business and industry. This is where a salesperson must be able to design a deal plan based on needs and conditions. So, the dealing process can run according to the set time period and the planned target.

    4. Sales Pipeline

    Sales pipeline , a term that refers to the steps in the process of selling a product or service. In providing an overview of the sales process, one of the pipelines that is often used is the sales team plan diagram. Where usually through this diagram a series of stages will be described starting from the prospect assessment, meeting with prospects, offering goods or services, to the transaction or deal stage .

    5. Sales Plan

    As with the sales pipeline , the sales plan describes the long-term goals, strategies, and objects of a company’s sales team. This includes details on pricing, target customers, market conditions, team structure, revenue targets, and others. However, what is no less important is the existence of tactics and techniques in the sales plan to realize the targets that have been set.

     

    Several Position in Sales Departement

    Furthermore, we also need to know that sales within the company also have a position with its own name. The following, there are several positions that are usually under the sales team within the company, citing The Balance Careers , as follows:

    1. Sales Representative

    A sales representative is a position that is at the bottom level of a sales team. Thus, this position becomes the spearhead of the company’s sales. Success in this position will open up opportunities for career advancement to higher positions. Usually, the sales representative position within the company is known by various names, such as sales agent, brand ambassador , advertising representative , account representative , and so on.

    2. Sales Management

    Sales management is a level position above the sales representative . In charge of the sales representative , the position of the sales manager is at the same level as the supervisor .

    In addition, the sales manager is also in charge of leading the sales team within the company, so they also have the authority to set goals and analyze sales. For this reason, in some companies, a sales manager also interacts directly with big buyers, in order to build good relationships so that the big buyers are loyal and stay subscribed to the company.

    As in general, sales manager positions in companies have various names, for example area manager, account manager, franchise development manager , business development manager , and others.

    3. Sales Administration

    Sales administrative generally plays a role in assisting the administration of the sales team. For example, helping with travel permits, preparing quotations , preparing marketing kits for buyers, as well as calculating and managing the administration of bonuses given to loyal buyers .

    In addition, in some companies, the sales administrative also has a crucial role in bridging the marketing and sales teams . As with other positions, sales administrative is also referred to by many names within the company, such as business development representative , financial assistant , enterprise representative , and industry representative .

    4. Account Executive

    Account executive or commonly abbreviated as AE is a position that is almost similar to a sales manager but has slightly more duties.

    In terms of duties, AE generally establishes a relationship between the company and its clients as well as maintains good relations with existing clients. So, AE is not only focused on attracting new clients.

    However, an AE is required to have a deep understanding of the product. At the same time, you must always keep up with industry and market development trends, of course. That’s why AE is usually closer to repeat customers. Meanwhile, in the company itself, AE is generally known by several names, such as channel partner executive , client executive, account handler , and others.

    5. Executive-Level Management

    This position is usually occupied by someone with 10 years or more experience in sales. The reason is, for executive-level management positions, they generally determine and direct the company’s long-term sales goals and targets.

    In addition to the provision of experience, an executive-level management must also have sufficient knowledge of market competition and the products to be sold to buyers. That is why, this position requires great responsibility in marketing planning as well as planning the relationship between the company and its customers. While in the company, besides being called executive-level management , this position is sometimes also called sales director , chief sales officer , and even chief financial officer .

    Closing

    From the explanation above, we can not learn how crucial the role of sales is to sell products until they reach consumers. Therefore, it is no exaggeration to say that sales are the spearhead of the company. In fact, almost all companies have a sales team. So, after knowing what sales are and what they do, are you interested in a career as a salesperson ? Hopefully this article from sinaumedia.com is useful, friend!

  • Definition & Examples of Inorganic Waste

    Definition & Examples of Inorganic Waste

    Understanding Inorganic Waste & Examples of Inorganic Waste – Sinaumedia readers, did you know that inorganic waste takes approximately 500 years to decompose? This of course will have a negative impact on living things on earth.

    n fact, many parties have tried and urged the people around them to be able to sort and choose which is inorganic waste and which is organic waste. 

    This problem is very crucial so that in-depth knowledge related to inorganic waste is needed. Therefore, this article will provide an explanation about inorganic waste. Listen to the end of the discussion.

    What is Inorganic Waste?

    Inorganic Waste

    Inorganic waste is a kind of garbage or the rest of the material that is not easily decomposed which usually does not originate from animals and plants. Inorganic waste can be in the form of plastic, glass or glass bottles, cans, paper, and other food wrappers.

    It should be noted that most inorganic wastes do not decompose naturally. Even if there is something that can be decomposed naturally, the waste will take a longer time when compared to organic waste.

    The danger is that if inorganic waste is allowed to accumulate, it will result in the emergence of various diseases, such as cholera and diarrhea. Not only that, various environmental pollution can also occur, such as soil and water pollution.

    Based on the type, inorganic waste is divided into three, namely solid inorganic waste, liquid inorganic waste, and gas inorganic waste. For a more complete explanation of the three types of inorganic waste, see the explanation below.

    Types of Inorganic Waste

    Inorganic waste is divided into several types. This division is useful for determining what processing is appropriate to do so that waste or garbage does not damage or pollute the surrounding environment.

    The following are the types of inorganic waste based on their form, including:

    1. Solid Inorganic Waste

    Solid inorganic waste is waste that is hard, solid, and can be touched or handled. There are also solid inorganic wastes that cannot be touched because they contain hazardous chemicals. As for examples of solid inorganic waste, namely aluminum, iron, base, belong bottles, plastic, and several similar items.

    2. Liquid Inorganic Waste

    This inorganic waste is in the form of a very dangerous liquid originating from a factory or production company. Generally, these factories or production companies channel this liquid inorganic waste into rivers so that the living things that live there and the local environment will be damaged and polluted.

    Not only from factories or production companies, this liquid inorganic waste can also come from household activities or activities, such as from washing soap and detergent. Actually, the most dangerous thing is the waste from oil spills in the sea.

    3. Inorganic Waste Gas

    Inorganic waste gas or wind is waste that cannot be touched by the senses. Generally, this inorganic waste gas comes from chimneys in production factories. The smoke or steam will be very dangerous because it can cause the earth to be hotter, prone to acid rain, and various pollutants will increase.

    Apart from factory chimney smoke, this inorganic waste gas can come from gas or motor vehicle fumes that contain carbon monoxide or CO gas which if inhaled will be dangerous, and can even cause death.

    Inorganic Waste

    Characteristics of Inorganic Waste

    To make it easier to know in detail what inorganic waste looks like, first identify the characteristics and characteristics of inorganic waste. The following will briefly describe the characteristics of inorganic waste, including:

    1. The main characteristic of this inorganic or non-natural waste is that it is not easily biodegradable . This means that this inorganic waste will require a fairly long period of time to decompose and decompose naturally. In fact, some of these types of waste take decades to decompose into smaller substances, elements, or particles, such as undersea plastic waste.
    2. Next, the characteristic of this inorganic waste is that it is obtained or made from manufactured or synthetic materials . For example, styrofoam , which is an inorganic type of waste made from a mixture of synthetic materials, such as polystyrene and CFC gas, both of which can damage and thin the ozone layer or O3.
    3. Another characteristic of inorganic waste is that it can be processed through a recycling process . Although this inorganic waste is not easily decomposed as described in the first feature, this waste can be processed through a recycling process, either processed for other needs or processed into new goods which are certainly more useful. For example, plastic bottles can be processed into handicrafts and used as plant pots or the like.

    Examples of Inorganic Waste

    Here are some examples of inorganic waste, among others.

    • Plastic
    • Low Density Polyethylene (LDPE) and Low Linear Density Polyethylene LLDPE, which are types of agricultural plastic used for straw, greenhouse covers, and the like.
    • High Density Polyethylene (HDPE), which is a type of agricultural plastic used for pesticide containers or nursery pots.
    • Polypropylene (PP), a type of thermoplastic polymer used for woven tarpaulins, and so on.
    • Polystyrene (PS), a type of synthetic aromatic hydrocarbon polymer agricultural plastic used for nursery containers or media.
    • Crackle Bag
    • Iron Metal
    • Steel Waste
    • Broken Glass and Ceramics
    • Detergent Water
    • Leftover Bath Soap
    • Aluminum Cans
    • Textile Waste
    • Waste Oil
    • Bottle cap
    • Styrofoam
    • Used tires
    • Various Electronics
    • Pesticide Disposal

    Recently, the world has been fussed over by the presence of plastic pollutants and petroleum contaminants in the sea. Also the presence of radioactive pollutants and air pollution.

    Knowledge about the threat of human negligence, needs to be transferred to students as the foundation of hope for the nation’s leaders in the future. This book is expected to be able to provide insight regarding problems that occur in the environment, especially the problem of marine pollution.

    Examples of Inorganic Waste
    Examples of Inorganic Waste

    What are the Negative Impacts of Inorganic Waste?

    As is known, inorganic waste will have a negative and bad impact or influence not only on the environment, but on living things that live and live in that environment.

    Many people have tried to destroy inorganic waste in various ways, such as throwing it into the sea, burning it, and even dumping it in the ground.

    1. Negative Impact of Burning Inorganic Waste 

    Burning inorganic waste is tantamount to provoking air pollution. Then, the smoke that will be produced from burning the waste can threaten health, such as health for the lungs and heart. This is because the various pollutants contained in the inorganic waste will be dangerous and threaten health because of the toxic content or elements.

    2. Negative Impacts of Disposing of Inorganic Waste into Rivers and Seas

    Then, throwing inorganic waste into rivers, even into the sea will increase water pollution. Water which has a function as a source of human life, especially for drinking, bathing, washing, and other needs becomes very dangerous when used. Not only that, the disposal of inorganic waste into the sea will threaten the safety of marine biota.

    The United Nations or the United Nations has stated that 2.2 billion people do not have access to adequate and proper drinking water services. The amount of clean water available is still very less compared to the amount they should need.

    Experts also say that about 4.8 to 12.7 tons of waste enters the seabed every year. Inorganic plastic waste that gradually breaks down will form microplastics which in turn will be consumed again by humans, thus threatening health.

    Not only humans, but also animals. Imagine how many animals have died due to their inadvertent eating of inorganic waste that has been produced by humans. It is this waste or garbage that brings disease to the animals.

    Negative Impacts of Disposing of Inorganic Waste into Rivers and Seas
    Negative Impacts of Disposing of Inorganic Waste into Rivers and Seas

    3. Negative Impacts if Inorganic Waste is Piled on the Ground

    Inorganic waste that is attempted to be stockpiled can also have a bad impact, namely soil pollution. Groundwater can contain toxins because the soil has been mixed with various types of inorganic waste that contain toxic or toxic substances.

    Until finally, the balance of the ecosystem is also disturbed and has an impact on plant growth. Hoarding inorganic waste in the soil will not make the waste disappear or disappear, but rather cause problems.

    In addition, the fertility of the soil is disrupted which in the end the bad or negative impact returns to humans. Therefore, it is very important to pay attention to these inorganic wastes and return to pay attention and think about this problem seriously and carefully.

    Used plastic bottles that are considered trash can turn out to be useful items, even worth selling, and indirectly we protect the environment because it helps reduce the amount of waste.

    Benefits of Inorganic Waste

    Inorganic waste is indeed a threat to the environment, but currently, inorganic waste management has been considered. This has resulted in the threat of inorganic waste being slightly reduced, although not completely.

    There are several inorganic wastes that can be processed and recycled and are environmentally friendly so that they can be reused. Then there are some important benefits of inorganic waste that you and all of us need to know. Here are some of the benefits of inorganic waste for human life, including:

    1. Inorganic Waste as a Basic Material for Making Handicrafts

    In this increasingly modern era, creative hands have emerged from the people of Indonesia and also the world so that they have started to see and consider the benefits or hidden uses of this inorganic waste.

    The first benefit of inorganic waste is that it can be used as material for making handicrafts or handicrafts. As for several types of handicrafts which are derived from inorganic waste, it turns out that they have high economic value or selling value. Moreover, handicrafts from the processed inorganic waste can develop into a business or business opportunity that is quite large.

    How come? Yes, that’s because, as explained earlier, creative hands have emerged so that even inorganic waste materials can be transformed and managed into various types of handicrafts that are useful and of sale value.

    Inorganic Waste as a Basic Material for Making Handicrafts

    2. Reusable _

    The term reusable means that an inorganic waste or similar material does not need to be disposed of. In other words, in the end, this type of waste will not be different, but can be useful and reused without having to be disposed of.

    For example, used cardboard. If used cardboard is disposed of, of course the cardboard will become one of the materials or inorganic waste that can pollute the environment. However, the cardboard can be used for other needs or purposes. Until finally, the cardboard is not a waste, but can be useful and used for other purposes.

    3. Inorganic Waste can be Melted to Make Other Goods

    There are some inorganic wastes, such as plastic and metal, which are inorganic wastes with high economic value. As we know that metal materials or waste can be smelted or re-melted together with other metals. Then, the metal that has been melted will return to a liquid metal that can be transformed into a new form.

    For example, scrap metal from collectors can be taken to a metal smelter. Then, after the irons are melted down and some other chemical elements are added, the melted iron becomes new iron that can be used and reused.

    4. Inorganic Waste for Recycled Materials

    Inorganic waste is often used as a material for recycling. Generally, the material used for recycling is plastic waste which is easy to collect and then recycle.

    This recycling of inorganic plastic waste can reduce the possibility of the accumulation of other inorganic wastes that exist. This is certainly a positive impact on the state of the environment around us.

    5. Inorganic Waste Can Make Money

    Next, inorganic waste can generate money. Because besides being made and processed into handicrafts which are then sold and make money, of course you can also sell bottles and used inorganic waste. You can sell inorganic waste, such as used batteries, used newspapers, and the like to used goods collectors.

    Of course, you can exchange this for something in the form of cash. Although the amount obtained is not much, but this will be very profitable if we do it regularly. Because, apart from being able to help clean up the surrounding environment from inorganic waste, you can also get money from sales to these used goods collectors.

    How to Treat Inorganic Waste

    In order to avoid the bad impact of inorganic wastes, it is necessary to carry out appropriate utilization methods, namely recycling inorganic waste into goods that can be reused.

    However, there is an important point that must be done, namely separating in advance which is organic waste and which is inorganic waste in your home. Thus, waste that is still fit for recycling will be easier to process.

    How to Treat Inorganic Waste
    How to Treat Inorganic Waste

    Below will be explained several types of waste that can be reused

    1. Inorganic Waste in the form of Cans

    Canned waste is a type of waste that cannot be decomposed even though it has been waste for hundreds, even thousands of years. Therefore, as much as possible we use inorganic waste cans as recycling material so that the quantity of waste does not continue to soar.

    The simple way is to use used drink, paint, or food cans as flower pots or media to store other items.

    2. Inorganic Waste in the form of Glass Bottles

    In waste treatment or recycling facilities, inorganic waste in the form of glass bottles or glass bottles will usually be reprocessed into new bottles.

    3. Inorganic Waste in the form of Paper

    Management of inorganic waste in the form of paper can be done at home. The trick is to collect some books or papers that are no longer used (used), then hand them over to a waste bank or to a waste paper collector in places that are specifically meant to recycle such inorganic waste.

    Instead of just piling them up or throwing them into the sea, it would be nice if the remaining papers were processed into useful recycled paper, such as bags, masks, and some other handicrafts.

    4. Inorganic Waste in the form of Fabric

    We often ignore the existence of inorganic fabric waste. Clothes, pants, and the like that are not used have piled up in the closet. To overcome this, there is a way to reuse it so that its use can also change. For example, clothes that are no longer used can be used as mops, rags, or donated to people who need it more if the clothes are still fit for use.

    As for inorganic waste craftsmen, usually inorganic waste in the form of cloth will be modified into a dispenser cover, table cloth, and even blankets.

    5. Inorganic Waste in the form of Plastic

    Currently, inorganic waste in the form of plastic such as used food packaging has been processed into various kinds of crafts, including handicrafts for wallets, tissue holders, small bags, and even clothes.

    That way, if we encounter plastic waste at home, it would be nice not to just throw it away. Try to separate and clean it from other waste, then you can give it to a waste bank or to an existing recycling place.

    Hopefully this article can add to your insight, yes!

  • From Spark to Blaze: The Causes and Impacts of Forest Fires

    From Spark to Blaze: The Causes and Impacts of Forest Fires

    Causes and impacts of forest fires – Before discussing fires, of course, we must first know what the definition of fire is. In this case, of course, fire has a role as a trigger for a fire that occurs somewhere. A small fire can become big and start a fire.

    Fire is a chemical reaction formed from three elements, namely heat, oxygen, and fuel that produce light and heat. The three elements are combined and become one element, namely fire. That’s why the fire we see today can produce light as well as a sense of heat around it.

    There is so much to know about water, fire, and air, such as their uses, properties, sources, and dangers. This book is perfect for those of you who want to know. Learning becomes fun and adds insight.

    Fire itself is an uncontrolled fire that can damage safety and property around us. The nature of the fire before the fire becomes very large, usually burning nearby objects within 3 to 10 minutes. That is why if a fire occurs in a residential area, it will spread to nearby houses. Especially if the fire occurred in the forest. All life in the forest such as flora, fauna, and even humans can also die because of fires that occur.

    Therefore, on this occasion, Sinaumedia will discuss the causes and impacts of forest fires. For those of you who are curious about the causes and effects, let’s look at the following review!

    Forest fires

    Forest and peat fires are surface fires where fire burns fuel such as, (debris, trees, shrubs, etc.) above the surface. Then, the fire spreads irregularly below the surface (earth fire), burning organic matter through peat holes and roots of bushes/trees, the tops are bound to catch fire.

    In its development, the fire spreads both vertically and horizontally in the form of smoke pockets, burning with only white smoke visible above the surface. The fire will be very difficult to extinguish, considering that the fire starts underground and only smoke rises to the surface.

    Previously, Indonesia had experienced forest fires with the largest volumes, these fires occurred in 1982, 1983, 1991, 1994, 1997, 1998, 2006 and 2015. Fires in 2015 covered 80% of Sumatra’s area with thick smoke from fires. The impact of forest fires is certainly detrimental to various parties, ranging from the economy, health, and also social society because the smoke also disturbs neighboring countries. Therefore, it is necessary to take serious handling of this disaster and analyze the causes of its occurrence.

    Forest fires in indonesia
    Forest fires map in indonesia

    Causes of Forest Fires

    The causes of forest fires certainly have various things, namely from nature and humans. Here are the causes that make forest fires.

    1. Prolonged Drought

    The dry season that is too long is the cause of forest fires because nature is difficult to control. These fires are often started by the friction of trees or dry leaves. Naturally occurring friction can cause fires and forest fires. Forest fires due to the long dry season often occur on mountain slopes.

    2. Lightning Strike

    Lightning is a natural cause of forest fires. In general, lightning strikes have a greater impact in the dry season. If the soil with vegetation is dry and flammable. Sometimes lightning causes fires in rough, hard-to-reach terrain.

    Just like what happened in California in August 2020. Lightning continued to strike for almost three days. This occurred as many as 12,000 strikes and sparked large-scale fires. This fire is recorded as the largest fire in California.

    3. Volcanic Eruption

    Volcanic eruptions are the cause of forest fires that occur naturally. These forest fires become more intense in the long dry season. The greatest risk is that the vegetation area will be burned by the volcanic material ejected during the eruption.

    Forest fires in mountainous areas are difficult to control and invisible. Usually, only clouds of white smoke can be seen from a distance. If you see smoke from the mountains, it indicates that the vegetation is burning.

    Volcanic Eruption

    4. Indiscriminate Deforestation

    Mass indiscriminate logging is one of the causes of forest fires that should not be underestimated. Especially if people do logging carelessly. Deforestation machines are a cause of fire hazard, especially in the dry season because these machines emit sparks.

    5. Throwing Cigarettes Carelessly

    Smoking in the forest can cause forest fires. This time, not natural, but man-made. The risk is even greater when the vegetation dries up due to the long dry season. Not to mention cigarette sticks and dry leaves can burn if rubbed against each other. So, be careful when in the forest. To protect the environment, do not throw cigarette butts carelessly.

    6. Wildlife Hunting

    Hunting for wildlife also indirectly causes forest fires. Especially if the hunters hunt with firearms that can cause sparks. This not only depletes the forest, but also threatens the flora and fauna that inhabit the forest.

    7. Land Clearing

    Forest fires can start naturally. However, this does not apply in the case of land clearing. Most human actions are the cause of forest fires. Just like what happened in Kalimantan and Sumatra. Forest fires flare when new land is cleared for oil palm trees. Even forest fires that occur affect habitats in rural and urban communities.

    If forest fires have occurred then it is not only plants and animals that are a problem. Various health problems related to breathing pose a threat to local residents. In this case, the government must intervene to overcome it.

    8. Wild Burn

    Illegal burning creates valuable land with a high level of vulnerability. Uncontrolled fires spread easily into this critical forest area. Illegal burning often leaves residues in the form of dry leaves, twigs, and branches that grow and accumulate in forest areas. During the dry season the residue from this illegal burning can dry up and cause new forest fires.

    9. Campfire

    The forest is truly the most comfortable place to pitch a tent and camp. Then make a fire to keep it warm. Unfortunately, many people are wrong. Campfire debris that is not extinguished properly can cause forest fires.

    10. Population Migration

    The next cause of forest fires is forest invasion or migration of people in the forest. Not many people know about this. In connection with the increasing needs of people’s lives and the increasing number of families. This requires the community to increase the area of ​​their land.

    11. Farm Animal Feed

    People who live around the forest, most of them raise livestock and graze making it a side job to meet the needs of their families. The needs of forage (Forage Forage) and grazing areas must be met.

    To achieve good quality and a high level of palatability, people usually burn grasslands that are no longer productive. After the prairie is burned, new vegetation will grow with better quality and higher nutrient content. But, of course, it could also burn the surrounding forest.

    Causes of Forest Fires

    Forest Fire Impact

    Fire certainly has a bad impact on living things on earth, especially humans. The following is the impact of forest fires.

    1. Loss of Habitat for Living Creatures in the Forest

    Forest fires in Riau that occur automatically can damage the habitat of local animals. Creatures that live in the forest are expelled and stop surviving, such as interacting, foraging, breathing, and so on. There were also rumors that a tiger had come out of the forest. He is looking for another place to live to replace what he has lost. Apart from being homeless, the creatures in the forest could die if they failed to escape.

    The creatures of the forest have been searching and finding new habitats will disturb the people. If this continues and there is no further treatment, losses will occur. Humans will also lose their habitat because they will be displaced by animals that have lost their homes.

    2. The fall of a big tree

    A tree that was supposed to live for many years accidentally fell. The existence of what is happening will also be disturbed. If this continues, forest fires continue to occur and are not accompanied by appropriate repairs, we will lose green open spaces that can produce oxygen and natural resources. Indeed this time the results are not small, but the losses will be much greater.

    The disadvantage is that the existing agricultural land is used for construction and settlement, while the forests inhabited by other organisms are instead used to expand arable land. In the future, our generation will only think that the forest is just a fairy tale because the past has come, they can’t find the forest. The absence of the forest would also cause a lot of damage. Such as floods, landslides, global warming, and rising temperatures.

    3. Disrupted Health

    Forest fire smoke can cause local irritation of the mucous membranes of the nose, mouth and throat in direct contact with the smoke and cause allergic reactions, inflammation, and possibly infection, from ARI and if severe can cause pneumonia.

    The ability of the lungs and respiratory tract to fight infection is also impaired, making infection more likely. Acute Respiratory Infections (ARI) are becoming more likely to occur, mainly due to an imbalance in the immune system (host), bacteria/viruses, and other pathogens (agents) as well as a bad environment.

    4. Hard to Find Clean Water

    Forests are containers for water which is necessary for survival. If the forest continues to be drained, automatically nothing can hold water, both rainwater and mountain water. The presence of water and forest is proportional. If the forest is depleted, there is nothing left to hold water, reducing the groundwater supply (artesian).

    If this continues, it will be difficult for living things to get clean water. Losses due to lack of clean water, including public health, will be disrupted, the water cycle will be disrupted so that it affects climate change such as long droughts, and irregular rainfall cycles.

    5. Disrupted Economy

    This can happen because the smoke from pollution due to forest burning is very thick as a result, it disturbs residents to carry out economic transactions. This loss has an impact on residents because it can reduce the income of residents who work in the private sector. In addition, regional agencies also interfere with activities based on regional governments in carrying out regional development.

    Forest Fire Impact
    Forest Fire Impact

    6. Global Warming

    Due to the inclusion of chemicals such as carbon monoxide (CO) and aldehydes, pollution from intentionally forest fires is much more dangerous than natural forest fires. The disadvantage of contaminated smoke is that it interferes with public health and prevents plants from photosynthesis.

    In addition, the harmful effects of ozone, nitrogen oxides, carbon dioxide, and hydrocarbons. Different types of substances can travel long distances and be converted into other gases such as ozone or particles such as nitrate species and organic oxygen during this transport. The ozone layer can also be destroyed by these chemicals. When the ozone layer is damaged, the Earth’s surface temperature rises, global warming occurs, and the polar ice caps melt.

    In addition, UV rays radiate directly to the earth (nothing is in the way). It can also affect public health, including UV-induced skin cancer. The next disadvantage is the greenhouse effect it causes. This is because the smoke produced blocks the heat bouncing off the biosphere.

    As a result, the heat bounces off the surface and reflects the smoke that is present and cannot escape. If this continues, the greenhouse effect that occurs can melt polar ice, and if this happens the country could sink.

    The dynamics of changes in pollutants that enter the environmental body are increasingly varied in quality and more in terms of quantity, this is influenced by the high variety of human activities on earth. The entry of pollutants into the environment will have a direct and indirect impact on the environment and public health in the area. To anticipate this, an analysis of the potential risks both to the ecology and the community is carried out early so that the pollutant rate can be controlled and a prevention scenario is also made.

    7. Limited Food Ingredients

    Limited community activities outside the home or area hamper community farming. Not only because the community cannot carry out agricultural activities as usual, but also because the plants that are growing are no longer able to return to their optimal level.

    If this happens, the community will be malnourished. Even the food provided by the government is limited and cannot reach remote areas. The disadvantage of this food shortage is that long-term starvation can lead to death.

    that’s the article on the causes and effects of forest fires. Of course, these forest fires have a very bad impact on life on earth. Especially if this forest fire occurs because of human activity. With this, we must be able to maintain the forest as the lungs of the world so that we can still live healthy on earth.

  • From Tundra to Desert: An Overview of Biomes and Their Definition

    From Tundra to Desert: An Overview of Biomes and Their Definition

    In an ecosystem, organisms interact with each other with their environment, in this case, the notion of a biome becomes a very wide geographical area and is larger than an ecosystem itself.

    Biomes themselves are named and grouped according to climate and the plants and animals that live in them.

    If you want to travel around the world, you can visit dry deserts that have lots of cacti, cold poles with minimal plants, to humid tropical rain forests. These different areas of the Earth are called biomes.

    Below is complete information about the definition of a biome along with other important information. Listen well yes.

    Definition of biome

    1. In General

    A biome is a large area of ​​land classified according to climate, and the plants and animals that make their homes there. A biome contains many ecosystems within the same area.

    Land-based biomes are called terrestrial biomes. Water-based biomes are called aquatic biomes. Temperature, amount of precipitation and common organisms characterize the world’s biomes.

    2. According to Experts

    The following is the definition of biome according to experts, namely:

    a. Charles Kendrich

    The definition of a biome is a part of a large variety of geographical units in the earth. In the biome, it is seen based on the number of differences that exist in the types of vegetation from the climate and the environment in which flora and fauna live, which has no boundaries.

    b. Wikipedia

    The definition of a biome is an area that has the same geographical / climatic characteristics and includes communities of animals, plants, bacteria, soil organisms, and viruses.

    The scope of the biome includes several ecosystems along with large and distinct regional elements of the biosphere.

    A biome is characterized by the presence of a distinctive plant and animal community.

    Within the Earth itself, biomes can be grouped into seven main types of biomes, namely tropical rain forests, grasslands, savannas, deciduous forests, deserts, tundra, and taiga.

    The vegetation that takes place in each environment has its own uniqueness.

    The uniqueness of plant vegetation is a form of plant adaptation to a unique growth environment.

    bioma

    Function of Biome

    the determination of biome in a particular area is done not without reason, specifically in the biological aspects related to the diverse classification of flora & fauna.

    Well, here are some functions of determining biomes that you need to know, namely:

    • Facilitate data collection activities for various types of flora and fauna species.
    • Facilitate the process of grouping various types of flora and fauna that have just been discovered / known.
    • As a method to find out the types of flora and fauna by observing the way of life of these living things in adapting to their environment.
    • Help so that the arrangement of certain populations can run easily and smoothly.

    Characteristic of Bioma

    As mentioned above, biomes are created due to differences in geographical location between regions, the intensity of sunlight, and also rainfall.

    From this review, it can be seen that the biome has the following characteristics:

    • Can be recognized by looking at the main vegetation.
    • Occupies a very wide area / area.
    • It is a collection of various types of population.
    • Created as a result of the interaction between the environment and organisms that live in the environment itself.
    • In a biome, there are producers, consumers, and decomposers (decomposers).
    • The community life is quite stable, unless something happens that can cause the community to become unstable/disturbed.
    • The name of the biome is generally given by looking at / adjusting to the dominating vegetation.

    Factors Affecting the Biome

    Referring to the understanding related to biomes, we can conclude that the existence of a biome with all its characteristics can be caused by several factors.

    Here are some factors that have a great influence on the state of the biome, among them are:

    • Geographical location.
    • Rainfall.
    • Climatic conditions / conditions.
    • The intensity of light from the sun.

    Kinds of Biomes

    After knowing the various reviews related to the definition of the biome above, then you need to know the types of the biome itself in the review below.

    1. Grassland Bioma

    mongolian-Manchurian-Plain-grassland

    Grasslands can be found in tropical / subtropical areas. The rainfall in this biome is 250-500 mm/year.

    Steppes or savannas are generally located in the border area between the tropics and subtropics. For example, in Southern Russia, Hungary, South America, Central Asia, and Australia.

    The following are the characteristics of the prairie or steppe biome, namely:

    • Has poor porosity and drainage due to irregular rain.
    • During the day, the air temperature is 45 degrees C. At night, the air temperature can reach 0 degrees C.
    • Evaporation (evaporation) is easier than precipitation.
    • The humidity is very low.

    The predominant plant on this type of biome is grass. No wonder when experts refer to it as grassland biome. Stepa itself is a term for grassland for Russian society.

    While the animals that can be found in this place are zebras (Africa), bison (America), lions, kangaroos (Australia), wild dogs, wolves, and cheetahs.

    2. Desert Biome

    Desert Biome

    The desert is known for its area of ​​minimal rainfall. The average rainfall in the desert can be said to be very low, which is below 20 cm/ year.

    Extreme temperatures that can occur in desert areas can reach 60 degrees C. It is not surprising that the soil structure is very fragile.

    Even so, there are still animals and plants that can survive in this desert biome.

    Examples of plants that can live in the desert biome are succulents, cacti, eucalypts, and plants with other stiff leaves.

    And for the animals themselves there are camels, scorpions, spiders, snakes, lizards, and several types of insects.

    3. Tropical Forest Biome

    Tropical Forest Biome

    The definition of a tropical forest biome is one type of forest that is very fertile and can only be found in the tropics. The diversity of plants that live in this biome is also very high.

    You can find this type of biome along the Amazon River – Orinoco, Central America, and most of Southeast Asia, Papua New Guinea, and the Congo Basin in Africa.

    The following are the characteristics of the tropical forest biome, namely:

    • Has a temperature range of 25 degrees C – 31 degrees C.
    • Has a high rainfall throughout the year, namely 200 – 225 cm/ year.
    • There is no significant change in temperature from one month to another.
    • Illuminated with sunlight all year round.
    • There are lots of big trees that make the area in the forest seem always dark.
    • Has very fertile soil.

    The plants that you can find in this biome include woody plants with a height of 20-40 m, epiphytes, rattan, bird’s nest nails, orchids, and others.

    And for the animals are squirrels, monkeys, various types of birds, lions, tigers, jaguars, and other animals.

    4. Savannah Biome

    Savannah Biome

    In general, this one savanna is almost the same as a prairie. But what distinguishes between the two is the presence of trees that grow in spreads, such as palms and acacias.

    Advertisement

    This type of biome is located in the tropics and subtropics.

    The following are the characteristics of the savanna forest biome, namely:

    • Has a rainfall of 250 – 700 mm/ year. There is a uniqueness associated with the rainfall, that is, when the rainfall in the savannah is low (250 – 500 mm/ year), then the savannah will become a bush. However, when the rainfall is high (500 – 700 mm/ year), the savannah will turn into a rainforest.
    • The dry months last from December to February. The wet month takes place in May.
    • The intensity of the rain is irregular.
    • Drainage / water flow takes place quickly.
    • High porosity / permeation.

    Animals that can live in this type of biome are zebras, lions, giraffes, elephants, and buffaloes.

    The most famous sabana is in East Africa, specifically Tanzania, which is in the Serengeti Plateau.

    5. Taiga Biome

    Taiga

    The taiga biome is a biome dominated by leafy, needle-like plants.

    You can find this type of biome between the subtropics and the poles, such as Russia, Scandinavia, Alaska, Siberia, and Canada.

    The following are the characteristics of the taiga forest biome, namely:

    • Has a fairly high temperature difference in summer and winter.
    • The growth of trees takes place in the summer, which is between 3-6 months.
    • Has a rainfall of 250 mm/ year.
    • Summer only lasts 3 months, the rest is winter.

    Plants that can live in the taiga area are dominated by coniferous plants such as albus, pine, juniper, spruce, elder, and spruce.

    As for the animals that live in this biome, such as wolves, black bears, squirrels, and several types of birds.

    6. Deciduous Forest Biome

    Deciduous Forest Biome

    Autumn is one of the seasonal characteristics that you can only find in some subtropical countries / four seasons.

    So it is not surprising that the deciduous forest biome can only be found in subtropical areas, such as Korea, China, Japan, Australia, the eastern part of the United States, and England.

    The number of trees that live in this biome is not much and not too close. The various plants will wither / drop their leaves when winter arrives.

    The following are the characteristics of the deciduous forest biome, namely:

    • Has a high rainfall throughout the year, namely 700 – 1,000 mm/ year.
    • It has four seasons, namely spring, winter, summer, and autumn.
    • Has a wide variety of low plant types.
    • The trees that live in this forest have leaves that are not too wide.

    The animals that can live in this forest are deer, wolves, bears, and woodpeckers.

    7. Mangrove Biome

    You can find mangrove biomes along the coast in tropical and subtropical regions.

    One of the functions of this mangrove forest is to minimize the effects caused by seawater abrasion.

    In Indonesia itself, mangrove forests are located along the east coast of Sumatra, the west and south coasts of Kalimantan, the Segara Anakan area, and Wonorejo Surabaya.

    The following are the characteristics of the mangrove forest biome, namely:

    • The water and soil have a high salt content.
    • The soil type is muddy soil.
    • The oxygen content in the water and the soil is low.

    Plants that can live in mangroves are mangroves, bogem trees, and firewood trees. As for the animals, there are crocodiles, fish, monitor lizards, and several types of birds.

    8. Tundra Biome

    Tundra is a term which means a plain without trees. It is clear that the tundra biome is a biome that is not inhabited by trees like other types of biomes. This is because the tundra biome is located in an area with extreme temperatures such as the polar regions.

    The vegetation in this tundra area is only in the form of moss and crust moss. The presence of tundra biome can be found in the Arctic and Antarctic regions.

    The following are the characteristics of the tundra biome, namely:

    • Has a very long winter duration, which is about 9 months.
    • It has very low rainfall, ie 100-250 mm/year.
    • The life span of the plants here is 3 months, exactly during the summer.
    • Most of the soil is source rock with little weathering.
    • The highest temperature there is only 10 degrees C and cold temperatures reach -35 degrees C.

    Plants that can live in the tundra biomass are mosses, crustaceans, and grasses.

    As for the animals that you can find in this area, namely penguins (south pole), polar bears (north pole), walruses, sea lions, polar dogs, wildebeest, thick hairy bison, and several types of birds.

    9. Sea Ice Bioma

    Sea ice biome is a biome that is located in sea ice / above frozen seawater that floats.

    The formation of the sea ice biome is the result of the interaction of all marine organisms from the polar oceans.

    10. Moss Forest Biome

    Moss Forest Biome

    You can find many moss forest biomes on the slopes of the mountains / mountains. A moss forest that is created in an area that is at the boundary of water vapor condensation.

    The most common plant found in moss forest biome types is moss. Moss growth that takes place on the surface of soil, rocks, and trunks of woody trees.

    This moss forest has various trees covered by moss. The moss forest biome has very high humidity as well as low temperatures.

    This condition causes dew to form and almost rains throughout the day.

    11. Seasonal Forest Biome

    Seasonal Forest Biome

    The seasonal forest biome consists of drought-resistant trees. These types of trees are included in trophophytic plants that can adapt to dry or wet conditions.

    During the dry season, the leaf form of plants in the forest biome this season is withered. On the other hand, during the rainy season, seasonal forest biome plants have dense leaves.

    The naming of the seasonal forest is adapted from the name of the tree type, such as teak forest and angsana forest.

    You can find many types of seasonal forest forests in Indonesia, especially in Central Java and East Java.

    Meanwhile, the types of fauna that are often found in the forest this season are deer, tigers, and wild boars.

    Also learn: Topographic Maps

    Examples of Aquatic Biomes

    Aquatic biomes are related to bodies of water.

    The following are some examples of aquatic biomes, namely:

    1. Marine Biome

    Marine biomes include the world’s oceans, the largest aquatic biomes, which are characterized by the presence of salt water. The oceans have various layers associated with the penetration of sunlight.

    2. Freshwater Biome

    The freshwater biome contains water where the salt concentration is very low and includes wetlands, ponds, lakes, and rivers.

    Lakes and ponds experience thermal mixing. This biome can accommodate waterfowl, fish, crustaceans, algae, and microorganisms.

    The river will continue to move towards the lake or ocean. Their current speed affects the types of species that live in them and also the clarity of the water.

    3. Coral Reef Biome

    Coral reefs are found in shallow parts of some tropical oceans. Made from the remains of various classifications of coral animals, this one reef accumulates over time and provides habitat for many underwater species.

    The Great Barrier Reef of Australia is a great example of a coral reef biome.

    4. Wetland Biome

    Wetlands are shallow bodies of water such as swamps and mud. They provide habitat for many plants as well as animals.

    On this type of biome has a stable water flow on freshwater wetlands.

    5. estuary Biome

    An estuary is where an ocean meets fresh water. Plants that can tolerate changes in salinity are referred to as holophytes. Estuaries offer important breeding sites for crustaceans as well as a variety of waterfowl.

    An example for a large estuarine biome is that of the Florida Everglades.

  • Understanding Intervention: Definition, Types, and Applications

    Understanding Intervention: Definition, Types, and Applications

    The definition of intervention in general is an action taken by a body to include its “understanding” like someone who wants to help. It can be said that the interventionist is a third party.

    There are also those who argue that intervention is an act of interfering in the political, economic, and cultural affairs of another country.

    Not a few people claim that intervention is an exaggeration, but basically intervention is done because of the intention to help.

    For more details, here sinaumedia will describe it specifically. In addition, we also present articles on the meaning of mitigation to add to your knowledge.

    Definition of Intervention According to Experts

    Experts have their own opinions on the intervention. To better understand it, you can refer to the opinions of experts as follows:

    1. Dr. Wirjono Prodojodikoro

    According to Dr. Wirjono Prodojodikoro, the notion of intervention is an intervention of a foreign country which is suppressive by means of violence or by threats of violence, if its wishes are not fulfilled.

    2. Parry and Grant

    Parry and Grant argue that the notion of intervention is the intervention of a dictatorial state against other countries with the aim of maintaining or changing certain actual conditions.

    3rd JG Starke

    JG Starke argued, the notion of intervention is a form of propaganda or other activities carried out by a country with the aim of encouraging a revolution or civil war in another country.

    4. Oppenheiman Lauterpacht

    Oppenheiman Lauterpacht stated, the meaning of intervention is the dictatorial intervention of a country in the affairs of other countries with the intention of maintaining or changing a situation, situation, or goods in that country.

    5. Black’s Law Dictionary

    Meanwhile, in the book Black’s Law Dictionary, the notion of intervention is the interference of a country in the affairs of another country by exploiting the power or threat it has.

    Kinds of Intervention

    Interventions are often used in various fields, such as law, government, health, nursing, psychology, education, and others. The following describes interventions in several areas:

    • Legal Intervention

    Third party interference in a matter or ongoing civil law between the plaintiff and the defendant.

    • Government Intervention

    Efforts and actions to pressure certain parties launched by the government in a work plan with the aim of achieving something even better.

    • Health Intervention

    Advertisement

    Rational actions carried out in the interests of patients on the basis of decisions of doctors or nurses or collaborative interventions between the two.

    • Nursing Intervention

    The intervention of a doctor or nurse made to help a patient move to a stage of health or complete recovery.

    • Psychological Intervention

    The form of psychological services individually, in pairs, groups or with families where patients come to the psychology bureau to treat certain psychological conditions.

    Forms of Intervention

    Kalevi J. Holsti revealed that intervention has six forms. The forms are as follows:

    1. Diplomatic Intervention

    A form of intervention in which a diplomat comments in favor of a political case or issue affecting the country in which he or she serves.

    2. Classical Intervention

    Interventions carried out with dark activities or secret missions. As an example of tapping information on a country with a specific purpose.

    3. Military Strength Exhibition

    This form is considered efficient because the cost is relatively cheap and the risk is low compared to sending a real military expedition to a place.

    4. Subversion 

    Subversion is known as the underground movement. Subversion is a political and military movement that is organized, supported, and directed by a foreign country, the purpose of which is to exploit various elements in the target country.

    5. Guerrilla

    Guerrilla is a combination of subversion with conventional warfare systems. Guerrillas are not always the result of intervention by foreign powers, but quite a number of guerrilla activities are manifestations of intervention.

    6. Military Intervention

    This form of intervention is manifested by sending military expeditions to support a government in power or assist rebel groups.

    Types of Interventions

    Based on the type, interventions are divided into two types, namely based on their reach and impact. Here’s the explanation:

    1. Interventions Based on Reach

    • Internal intervention : The act of intervening by a foreign country to support certain groups in order to defect or rebel against the legitimate government.
    • External Intervention : The act of intervention by a foreign country in the ongoing war between two other countries, which has the aim of reconciling or reducing conflict without defending one of the parties involved in the war.
    • Reprisal Intervention : Intervention activities carried out by a country with the aim of retaliating for losses suffered by other countries by causing losses, such as an example of a blockade.

    2. Interventions Based on Impact

    • Positive Intervention : Actions from foreign countries or world institutions that aim to uphold justice. One of the international organizations that often makes positive interventions is the United Nations (UN).
    • Negative Intervention : Reaction from foreign countries with the aim of obtaining or utilizing various products that exist in a country. This form of negative intervention is usually carried out by developed countries against developing countries.

    Examples of Intervention Actions

    • Carry out an embargo against a country that is hostile to other state institutions.
    • Sending soldiers to a warring country that was clearly none of his business.
    • Waging war by means of blockades to other countries, and having no connection at all.

    Thus the definition of intervention along with the types, forms, types, and examples of intervention actions. Hopefully it can be useful.

  • The Beauty of Multiculturalism: Definition and Significance

    The Beauty of Multiculturalism: Definition and Significance

    Indonesia is country that has a variety of cultures or a multicultural country. What does multiculturalism actually mean?

    This article will discuss more about multiculturalism. So watch and pay close attention.

    Understanding Multiculturalism in General

    Multiculturalism comes from English, namely from the words multi and cultural.

    Multi means many or more than one while cultural means culture. So multicultural is a culture that has many or more than one.

    While the term multiculturalism is a term used to describe a person’s view of the variety of life in the world.

    Multiculturalism can also be referred to as a cultural policy that emphasizes acceptance of the diversity and various kinds of cultures (multicultural) that exist in people’s lives.

    The culture concerns the values, norms, systems, culture, habits, customs, and politics adopted by them.

    Understanding Multiculturalism According to Experts

    Experts express their opinions regarding the meaning of multiculturalism, including the following:

    1. Lawrence Blum

    Multiculturalism is something that includes understanding, appreciating, and appraising one’s culture, as well as respect and curiosity about the ethnic culture of other people.

    2. Azyumardi Azra

    Multiculturalism is a world view that can be translated into various cultural policies.

    The cultural policy emphasizes the acceptance of the reality of religious plurality and multiculturalism in the life of a society.

    Multiculturalism can also be understood as a world view which is then manifested in political consciousness.

    3. Parekh

    Multiculturalism is an agreement that exists in society that is carried out to anticipate social conflicts through cooperation.

    The agreement itself was made because of the opportunity for various differences, such as habits and customs.

    4. Nasikun

    Multiculturalism is a condition of a pluralistic society which structurally has sub-cultures which are characterized by a lack of development of the value system, resulting in various conflicts.

    5. Rifai Harahap

    Multiculturalism is a community unit that is characterized by the merging of various forms of difference to be able to live together.

    By living together that has been planned, it is expected to be able to handle the impact of social phenomena such as conflicts that still often occur in the community.

    Types of Multiculturalism

    Multiculturalism is divided into 5 types, namely:

    1.  Accommodative Multiculturalism

    This accommodative multiculturalism includes people who have a dominant culture that makes certain adjustments and accommodations for the cultural needs of minorities.

    The community here formulates and applies culturally sensitive laws, statutes, and provisions.

    Society also gives freedom to minorities to maintain and develop their culture.

    On the other hand, minorities do not challenge the dominant culture.

    This accommodative multiculturalism is applied in several countries in Europe.

    2.  Autonomous Multiculturalism

    Autonomous multiculturalism includes a plural society in which the main cultural groups seek to achieve equality.

    They challenge the dominant group and seek to create a society in which all groups can exist on an equal footing.

    3.  Interactive or Critical Multiculturalism

    Interactive or critical multiculturalism includes a plural society where cultural groups are not too focused or concerned with autonomous cultural life.

    They rather form a collective creation that reflects and affirms their own distinctive perspectives.

    4.  Isolationist Multiculturalism

    Isolationist multiculturalism refers to a society in which various cultural groups live autonomously and engage in minimal interaction with one another.

    5. Cosmopolitan Multiculturalism

    This cosmopolitan multiculturalism includes efforts to eliminate cultural boundaries to create a society that is no longer bound to a particular culture.

    And conversely, freely involved in intercultural experiments and at the same time develop their own cultural life.

    Elements of Multiculturalism

    here are several elements of multiculturalism, especially in Indonesia. The following are the elements of multiculturalism in Indonesia:

    1. Tribes; ethnic groups in Indonesia are very diverse, ranging from Sabang to Merauke.
    2. Race; Race in Indonesia arises because of the large grouping of humans who have biological characteristics, such as hair color, skin color, body size, and so on.
    3. Religion and Belief; Religion and belief in Indonesia is quite diverse, ranging from Islam, Christianity, Catholicism, Hinduism, Buddhism, to Kong Hu Cu.
    4. Ideology; ideology has a strong influence on behavior.
    5. Political; Politics is an attempt to enforce social order.
    6. Manners; Manners are all actions, behaviors, customs, manners, greetings, words and abilities in accordance with certain rules and norms.
    7. Social gap; there is a classification of people based on caste.
    8. Economic Gap; There are differences in income between people.

    Characteristics of Multiculturalism

    The characteristics of a multicultural society are as follows:

    1. Experiencing segmentation in groups with different sub-cultures.
    2. Has a social structure that is divided into non-complementary institutions.
    3. Low consensus among institutional members.
    4. There are relatively frequent conflicts and debates.
    5. Integration tends to occur by coercion.
    6. There is political dominance over other groups.

    The Cause of Multiculturalism

    Multiculturalism happens for a reason. Here are some of the reasons for the occurrence of multiculturalism:

    1. Geographical factors; In an area that has different geographical conditions, there will definitely be differences in the community.
    2. climatic factors;  In an area that has different climatic conditions, there will definitely be differences in the community.
    3. Foreign cultural influences; people who already know foreign cultures are likely to be affected by these foreign cultural habits.

    Multiculturalism Concept

    The concept of multiculturalism is a world view that is ultimately implemented in policy.

    The policy is about the willingness to accept other groups equally as a unit, regardless of differences in culture, ethnicity, gender, language, or religion.

    Forms of Multicultural Society

    The form of multicultural society is divided into 5 forms, namely:

    1. Primordialism

    Primordialism is a view or understanding that holds fast to various things that have existed since childhood.

    This view can be in the form of beliefs, traditions, customs, or everything that is in the first environment of an individual’s life.

    Primordialism has a function to preserve the culture of the group.

    However, this primordialism can also make an individual or group have an ethnocentrism attitude.

    Ethnocentrism is an attitude that tends to be subjective in viewing other people’s cultures.

    They will find it difficult to accept other understandings other than the understanding they have brought since childhood.

    So primordialism can be interpreted with an ingrained belief.

    2. Ethnocentrism

    Ethnocentrism is the assumption of a social group that their group is the most superior compared to other groups.

    They will find it difficult to accept other understandings other than the understanding they have brought since childhood (primordialism).

    So ethnocentrism can be interpreted with an assumption from social groups that their group is the most superior compared to other groups.

    3. Intersection

    Advertisement

    Intersection is a meeting or intersection which is known as a plural ethnic group in sociology.

    Intersection is also a meeting or crossing membership of a social group from various sections.

    Whether in the form of ethnicity, religion, social class, gender, and so on in a pluralistic society in sociology.

    This intersection will be formed through social interaction or intensive association of its members.

    This social interaction will be formed through the means of association in human culture, including language, art, means of transportation, markets, schools, and so on.

    So intersection can be interpreted as a society consisting of many tribes, cultures, religions, races, and others that blend into one unit in a particular community.

    4. Consolidation

    Consolidation is a process of strengthening thoughts on beliefs that have been believed to be getting stronger.

    Consolidation is also a strengthening process carried out to provide additional faith for someone on what someone already believes.

    So consolidation can be interpreted with a strengthening of what has been attached to him.

    5. Stream Politics

    Stream politics is a group of people who are incorporated into mass organizations that have a unifying force.

    The unifier can be in the form of political parties within a country.

    Political flow is also a community organization that is used to maintain and prosper members of the community.

    So political flow can be interpreted as a political party that has the support of community organizations as a power builder in general elections.

    Difference between Multiculturalism and Pluralism

    There are several differences between multiculturalism and pluralism, including the following:

    1. First

    Multiculturalism is an ideology that glorifies cultural differences or a belief that recognizes cultural pluralism as a way of life for people.

    While pluralism is an ideology that provides a comfortable space for the paradigm of difference as one of the fundamental entities of a human being.

    2. Second

    Multiculturalism is an understanding that requires people to live in tolerance, mutual understanding between cultures and between nations in building a new world.

    While pluralism is an understanding that recognizes the differences between ethnic groups, religions, cultures, and so on.

    3. Third

    Multiculturalism is an understanding which states that a society should consist of many different cultural groups in the same social status, or at least allow these different cultural groups to live in one area.

    While pluralism is an understanding which holds that people of different races, religions, and political beliefs can live peacefully in the same society.

    4. Fourth

    Multiculturalism only accepts cultural differences and does not study other cultures or explore other cultures

    While pluralism accepts the existence of other cultural differences and studies other cultures that are useful for avoiding conflicts.

    Also read: Understanding Culture

    Factors of Multicultural Society in Indonesia

    There are several factors of multicultural society in Indonesia, including the following:

    1. Geographical Factor

    The geographical location of Indonesia, which is between 2 continents and 2 oceans, has resulted in Indonesia being visited by many ethnic groups from all over the world.

    With this geographical location, Indonesia is also used as an international trade route.

    Thus many foreign countries come to Indonesia with the aim of trading, such as Arab, Indian, Chinese, and others.

    This is what adds to the entry of foreign cultures into Indonesia and the creation of a multicultural society.

    2. Climate Factor

    Due to the different climate in Indonesia, the pattern of livelihood, social order, livelihoods, and types of people are also different.

    For example, people who live in urban areas, the majority of people will work in offices or companies.

    While people who live on the coast, the majority of people will work as fishermen or fish traders.

    3. Indonesian History Factors

    This historical factor in Indonesia is a factor where other countries want to have what Indonesia produces, such as spices.

    So many foreign countries colonized Indonesia, such as Japan, the Netherlands, England, and Portugal.

    Members of these countries stay long enough in Indonesia and some even marry members of the Indonesian state.

    This is what adds to the richness of culture and race in Indonesia.

    4. Ethnic and Cultural Factors

    Indonesia has very diverse ethnic groups and cultures. This can make the community become multicultural.

    These ethnic groups and cultures can be in the form of:

    • Local language
    • Folk songs
    • Regional dance
    • Regional art
    • Regional specialties
    • Customs
    • Traditional clothes
    • Custom home
    • Musical instrument
    • Traditional weapon

    5. Race Factor

    There are 3 races in Indonesia that make society multicultural, namely:

    • The Mongoloid race, with the characteristics of a brown skin color, a little body hair, straight hair, and slanted eyes.
    • Negroid race, with characteristics of black skin color, curly hair, thick lips, and straight eyelids.
    • Caucasoid race, with the characteristics of white skin color, blond to brown hair color, pointed nose, and straight eyelids.

    6. Physical and Geological Factors

    Indonesia’s geological structure is located between 3 different plates, namely Asia, Australia and the Pacific.

    This makes Indonesia an archipelagic country that has several geological types, such as the Asiatic type, the transitional type, and the Australis type.

    Thus, the life of the people of each island will be different according to the conditions of the island.

    For example, people living on small islands will experience difficulties with natural resources.

    While people who are on the big island they have a lot of natural resources.

    This is what makes the culture of each island different.

    7. Factors of Religion and Belief

    Religion and belief in Indonesia is also a factor in a multicultural society.

    The reason is that religions and beliefs in Indonesia are quite diverse, ranging from Islam, Christianity, Catholicism, Hinduism, Buddhism, to Kong hu cu.

    Examples of Multiculturalism

    There are many examples of multiculturalism, including the following:

    1. Respect interfaith.
    2. Attending invitations from other ethnic groups other than the tribes they believe in.
    3. Balinese people who can accept culture from other regions.
    4. Do not offend each other’s beliefs held by other communities.
    5. Does not mention the characteristics of the race owned by friends.
    6. It is not allowed to use loudspeakers when calling the call to prayer.
    7. Anti-discrimination regulations in the use of public facilities.
    8. They mingle with one another regardless of the background of people who share the same vision and mission as us.
    9. There is a prohibition in holding worship due to the disturbing sound.
    10. Holding mutual cooperation activities every Sunday to maintain the cleanliness and preservation of the living environment.

    Conclusion

    From the above explanation about the notion of multiculturalism, you must know that multiculturalism in Indonesia is very diverse.

    Although there are many definitions of multicultural, basically multicultural has the meaning of diverse cultures.

    These cultures coexist with each other, live in peace even though sometimes there are conflicts.

    So as a good Indonesian society, you must be able to accept the cultural diversity that exists in Indonesia.

    Thus, we can convey about the meaning, types, elements, characteristics, causes, concepts, forms of society, factors, and examples of multiculturalism.

    Hopefully with this article you can understand what multiculturalism is and apply it in everyday life. Thank you

    Question and answer

    What is the meaning of multiculturalism?
    Multiculturalism is a term used to describe a person’s view of the variety of life in the world.
    Multiculturalism can also be referred to as a cultural policy that emphasizes acceptance of the diversity and various kinds of cultures (multicultural) that exist in people’s lives.
    The culture concerns the values, norms, systems, culture, habits, customs, and politics adopted by them.
    Mention 5 types of multiculturalism!
    Accommodative
    Multiculturalism Autonomous
    Multiculturalism Interactive or Critical
    Multiculturalism Isolationist
    Multiculturalism Cosmopolitan
    What are the elements of multiculturalism?
    Ethnicity
    Race
    Religion and Beliefs
    Ideology
    Politics
    Manners
    Social
    Disparities Economic Gaps
    What are the characteristics of a multicultural society?
    Experiencing segmentation in groups with different sub-cultures.
    Has a social structure that is divided into non-complementary institutions.
    Low consensus among institutional members.
    There are relatively frequent conflicts and debates.
    Integration tends to occur by coercion.
    There is political dominance over other groups.
    What are the causes of multiculturalism?
    Geographical
    factors Climatic factors
    Foreign cultural influences
    Mention 5 forms of multicultural society!
    Primordialism
    Ethnocentrism
    Intersection
    Consolidation
    Political Stream
    What are the factors of multicultural society in Indonesia?
    Geographic
    Factors Climate
    Factors Indonesian History
    Factors Ethnic and Cultural
    Factors Race
    Factors Physical and Geological
    Factors Religion and Belief Factors
    Mention some examples of multiculturalism that you know!
    Respect interfaith.
    Attending invitations from other ethnic groups other than the tribes they believe in.
    Balinese people who can accept culture from other regions.
    Do not offend each other’s beliefs held by other communities.
    Does not mention the characteristics of the race owned by friends.
    It is not allowed to use loudspeakers when calling the call to prayer.
    Anti-discrimination regulations in the use of public facilities.
    They mingle with one another regardless of the background of people who share the same vision and mission as us.
    There is a prohibition in holding worship due to the disturbing sound.
    Holding mutual cooperation activities every Sunday to maintain the cleanliness and preservation of the living environment.
  • Why Plurality Matters: An Overview of Definition and Examples

    Why Plurality Matters: An Overview of Definition and Examples

    Plurality is an understanding of diversity to be able to live tolerantly in the midst of society. The community here is a pluralistic society both culturally, religiously, linguistically , politically, and so on. Plurality is also known as pluralism.

    Understanding Pluralism

    Webster’s Revised Unabridge Dictionary

    According to Webster’s Revised Unabridged Dictionar , plurality is

    • results or circumstances being plural.
    • the state of being a pluralist; have more than one about belief.

    Pluralism according to experts

    The following are some experts who contribute their views regarding the notion of pluralism or plurality.

    • Mohammad Shofan
      Pluralism is an effort to build a theological normative awareness and social awareness.
    • Syamsul Maa’arif
      According to Syamsul Maa’rif, pluralism is an attitude of mutual understanding and respect for differences in order to achieve inter-religious harmony.
    • Webster
      Pluralism is a social condition that exists in various ethnicities, religions, races and ethnicities that maintain the tradition of participating in society. This situation creates a pattern of people living side by side in the existing diversity.
    • Anton M. Moeliono
      Pluralism is a thing that gives plural meaning in terms of different cultures in a society. Respect for other cultural values ​​and mutual respect are the basic foundations for the creation of pluralism.
    • Santrock
      Santrock states that Santrock is the acceptance of each individual who believes that cultural differences must be maintained and respected.

    plurality attitude

    Attitudes that reflect plurality include the following:

    • Living in Difference (Attitude of Tolerance/Tasamuh)
      The attitude of accepting other people who are different in view of our personal way of life.
    • Mutual Respect Place
      all human beings in a relation of equality, no one is higher or lower.
    • Mutual trust
      Mutual trust is one of the most important elements in living relationships between human beings in a culture or society.
    • Interdependence (the attitude of mutual need / interdependence)
      Humans are social creatures (homo socius) , between one another are mutual need and complement each other.

    An example of a plurality attitude

    Examples of the application of the attitude of plurality in being carried out are as follows.

    • A company that accommodates people who have different ethnicities, races, and religions
    • The four houses of worship that were built side by side in Kalipuru Hamlet, Kendal, Central Java are a small example of the high plurality of Indonesian society.
    • Balinese people who are predominantly Hindu can live side by side with immigrant communities living in Bali who in fact have religions outside of Hinduism.
    • Help others when they have an accident or become a victim of a natural disaster.
    • Togetherness in mutual cooperation activities to clean up the surrounding environment.

    The impact of the attitude of plurality

    The direct and indirect consequences of the existence of a plurality attitude will provide benefits, among others, as follows:

    • The emergence of mutual respect.
    • Tolerance everywhere.
    • Creating a pluralistic society
    • etc
  • Sales Forecasting: Definition, Importance, and Techniques

    Sales Forecasting: Definition, Importance, and Techniques

    What is a Sales Forecast?

    Sales forecasting or sales forecasting is the process of estimating future revenue by predicting the number of products or services that a sales unit (which can be an individual salesperson, sales team, or company) will be sold in the following week, month, quarter, or year.

    Simply put, a sales forecast is a projected measure of how the market will respond to a company’s entry into the market.

    Why is Sales Forecast Important?

    Forecast is about the future. It’s hard to overstate how important it is for companies to produce accurate sales forecasts.

    Private companies gain confidence in their business when leaders can trust forecasts. For public companies, accurate forecasts provide credibility in the marketplace.

    Finance, for example, relies on forecasts to develop budgets for capacity and recruitment plans. Production uses sales forecasts to plan its cycle. Forecasts assist sales operations with territory and quota planning, supply chains with material purchasing and production capacity, and sales strategies with channel and partner strategies. These are just a few examples.

    Unfortunately, in many companies, this process remains disconnected, which can result in a loss of business. If information from sales forecasts is not shared, for example, product marketing may create demand plans that are not in line with sales quotas or sales attainment levels.

    This leaves the company with too much inventory, or too little inventory, or inaccurate sales targets — all mistakes that hurt the bottom line in your business. Committing to quality and regular sales forecasts can help avoid those costly mistakes.

    What are the benefits of having an accurate sales forecast?

    • An accurate sales forecasting process provides many benefits. This includes:
    • Better decision making about the future
    • Reduction of sales channels and risk forecast
    • Alignment of sales quotas and revenue expectations
    • Reduction of time spent planning area coverage and setting quotas
    • Benchmarks that can be used to assess future trends
    • Ability to focus the sales team on high-return, high-profit sales channel opportunities, resulting in better win rates

    How to Accurately Forecast Sales

    To create an accurate sales forecast, follow these five steps:

    1. Assess historical trends

    Check sales from the previous year. Break the numbers down by price, product, representation, sales period, and other relevant variables.

    Turn them into “sales rate”, which is the projected number of sales per sales period. This forms the basis of your sales forecast.

    2. Merge changes

    This is where estimates get interesting. Once you have a basic sales level running, you’ll want to tweak it according to the number of changes you see coming. As an example:

    Pricing.

    Did you change the price of a product? Are there competitors who might force you to change your pricing plan?

    Customers.

    How many new customers do you anticipate landing this year? How much did you land the previous year? Have you hired a new representative, gained measurable brand exposure, or increased the likelihood of acquiring a new customer?

    Promotion.

    Will you be running a new promotion this year? What was the ROI on the previous promotion, and how do you expect it to compare with the new promotion?

    Channels.

    Did you open a new channel? New location? New territory?

    Product changes.

    Are you introducing a new product? Changing your product range? How long did it take for the previous product to gain traction in the market? Would you expect a new product to act similarly?

    3. Anticipating market trends

    Now is the time to project all the market events you have tracked. Are you or your competitors going public? Are you anticipating an acquisition? Will there be laws that change how your product is received?

    4. Monitor competitors

    You’ve likely already done this, but consider competing products and campaigns, especially the major players in the field. Also check to see if new competitors might enter your market.

    5. Include a business plan

    Add it to all your business strategic plans. Are you in growth mode? What are the hiring projections for this year? Is there a new market you are targeting or a new marketing campaign? How does all this affect the forecast?

    Once you’ve calculated all of these things, build them into your estimates. You want everything to be detailed, so that you can understand the estimate in as much detail as possible.

    Different stakeholders in the company will likely want to understand different aspects of the forecast, so you should be able to zoom in or out as far as needed.

    Should you do a bottom-up sales forecast or a top-down sales forecast?

    In general, there are two types of sales forecasts: bottom-up forecasts and top-down forecasts.

    Bottom-up forecasting begins by projecting the number of units the company will sell, then multiplying that number by the average cost per unit. You can also build the number of locations, number of sales reps, number of online interactions, and other metrics.

    The idea behind bottom-up sales forecasting is to start with the smallest component of the forecast, and build from there.

    The advantage of bottom-up forecasting is that if a variable changes (such as cost per item, or number of representatives), the forecast is easy to change. It also provides quite detailed information. The top-down sales forecast starts with the size of the total market, then estimates what percentage of the market the business can capture.

    If the market size is $500 million, for example, a company can estimate that they can win 10 percent of that market, making their sales forecast $50 million for the year. When creating sales forecasts, it is important to use both of these methods.

    Start with a top-down method, then use a bottom-up approach to see if your first estimate is feasible. Or do both separately and see how well they fit together. To produce the most accurate estimates, companies must perform both types of estimates, and then adjust them to produce the same amount.

    The Key to Success in Forecasting Sales

    Improving the accuracy of your sales forecasts and the efficiency of the forecasting process depends on many factors, including strong organizational coordination, automation, reliable data, and analytics-based methodologies. Ideally, the sales forecast should:

    Collaborative

    Leaders must combine input from a variety of sales roles, business units, and regions. Frontline sales teams can be very useful here, providing an overview of the market you’ve never considered before.

    Based on data

    Predictive analytics can reduce the impact of subjectivity, which is often more backwards than forwards. Using common data definitions and baselines promotes alignment and saves time.

    Produced in real time

    Investing in real-time capabilities for correcting or re-estimating allows sales leaders to gain insight quickly so they can make more informed decisions. This allows them to quickly and accurately update forecasts based on demand or market changes.

    Single source, with multiple views

    Generating forecasts as a single data source gives you good visibility into your company’s reputation, region and performance, and helps align business functions across the organization.

    Better from time to time

    Use the data provided by the improved sales forecasting process to create more refined future forecasts with increasing accuracy over time against a set of accuracy goals.

    Companies with better forecasting processes and tools perform better than their peers because they better understand the drivers of their business and have the ability to shape the results of the sales period before the period closes.

    What are the Key Challenges in a Sales Forecast?

    It can be difficult to consistently produce accurate sales forecasts. Some keys to success in sales forecasting:

    Accuracy and Distrust

    When companies use spreadsheets for sales forecasts, they can run into accuracy issues, which in turn make forecasts less reliable. This accuracy issue can be exacerbated by:

    • Poor implementation of CRM across the company, and employees don’t enter data in a timely manner
    • Inconsistent data across teams or salespeople don’t include complete data.
    • Stakeholders across the company use different methodologies to generate their estimates
    • Inadequate collaboration across product, sales, and finance teams. This lack of collaboration can be enhanced when companies create sales forecasts manually or using spreadsheets.

    Subjectivity

    While generating quality sales forecasts relies heavily on forecasters making sound decisions about how to use data, in general, companies rely more on judgment and less on credible predictive analytics than they should.

    Companies that forecast with simple arithmetic pipe weighting, for example, may miss the nuances of the true drivers of accuracy, which might be number of employees, pricing decisions, or route-to-market emphasis points.

    Usability

    When a sales forecast is not created in a way that makes it useful to stakeholders across the company, it becomes much less effective than it should be. A good estimate should produce data that is relevant to many teams, and understandable to them.

    Inefficiency

    Sales forecasts can be very difficult to create when inefficiencies are incorporated into the forecasting process. For example, if an estimate has multiple owners, or the forecasting process is not clearly defined by a standard set of rules, there may be disagreements about how the forecast will be produced.

    Similarly, if input into the forecast is not reconciled before the forecast is produced, the forecast itself may undergo multiple revisions, which can reduce confidence in the forecast if a version is released and later revised.

    Conclusion

    To perform company-wide forecasts, companies need different elements of each business function.

    The following functions can contribute to sales forecasts:

    • Sales: Provides a bottom-up view, using data from CRM and PRM, building judgments from sales leaders. Sales can manage this process through the Sales Operations function, using the right tools, and reporting
    • Finance: Provide macroeconomic guidance and work with product teams.
    • Marketing: Provides macro market guidance, especially in industries such as telecommunications, retail and CPG. Marketing can also provide the financial team with market data.
    • Supply Chain: Provides input on inventory and production.
    • IT: Assist with sales forecasting by providing platform, data, integration, and technical support.

     

     

  • What is Branding? Here’s what it means and the difference with marketing

    What is Branding? Here’s what it means and the difference with marketing

    In every business, every company definitely needs marketing to market a product. In addition, companies also need branding so that a product can stick in the minds of consumers. Because of this, some people who are not familiar with business think that branding and marketing have the same meaning. What exactly is branding?

    Simply put, branding is the name of a business run by a company. While marketing is a strategy to build a business brand name. Want to get to know branding in full? Or want to know the difference between branding and marketing? Come on, see the full explanation below.

    Getting to Know What Branding Is

    The term branding comes from the word brand which means brand. So, what is branding that companies do in running their business? Branding is an image so that a product can attract and stick in the minds of consumers. You could say that branding can be interpreted as a form of company communication with targeted consumers.

    The main purpose of a branding is to introduce the company’s brand. In addition, branding also aims to build a positive image and reputation of the company so that it is always good in the eyes of consumers. The company’s image can build consumer confidence in the company.

    The easy understanding, what branding is can be seen from a name, logo, and slogan of a company that is attached to the minds of consumers. It can be said that branding tends to always attract consumers to return to a product marketed by the company. Generally, branding is done by new companies whose names are not well known to the public.

    The goal is none other than to introduce the company’s products and get as many consumers as possible. If the company has a good brand, then the company will be easy to sell products. So, the company can get many advantages. One of them is getting a lot of income.

    Branding Functions in a Business

    In a business run by a company, branding activities are needed. This is because branding has many functions in a business. Here is the full review.

    1. As a Differentiator

    The first function of branding in a business is as a differentiator. Every product that has a strong brand, consumers will find it easy to distinguish it from other company brands. In addition, branding can also provide a marker and characteristic of a product. Thus, the company’s products can always be remembered by consumers.

    2. For Promotion And Attractiveness

    If a product has a strong and well-known brand, then it will be an attraction for consumers. Thus, the product will be easier to promote to the public. In this case, the function of what branding is very important for a company’s business.

    3. Build Company Image

    Another function of branding is to build a corporate image. If a company has a good image, then the company’s products will be easily recognized by others. A good image can also show that the quality of the company’s products is unquestionable.

    4. Market Control Tool

    After branding activities are carried out, the company’s products will have a known name. Of course, this will make it easier for the company to control the market. This market control can be done because the wider community already knows and remembers the company’s products well.

    5.To Influence Consumer Psychology

    The last function of branding in business is to influence consumer psychology . If a product already has a strong brand, consumers will trust and consider the company professional. This is clearly different from products that do not have a brand. Consumers will clearly look down on the eyes because they lack confidence.

    Getting to Know Marketing in Brief

    Before knowing the difference between marketing and branding, you should first know what marketing is. Marketing comes from the word market with the meaning of market. Marketing is a marketing activity to form the relationship between companies and consumers. Forming company-consumer relationships can be done through advertising, selling products, or creating products according to market desires.

    Marketing is clearly different from branding. Branding is more of an activity to introduce the brand of a product. But marketing focuses on selling a company’s product. You could say that the main purpose of marketing is to increase the sales value of a product.

    Difference between Branding and Marketing

    In a business run by a company, branding and marketing have a close relationship. However, branding and marketing are clearly very different. The most visible difference between branding and marketing is the timeframe for implementation.

    To build a brand that can be known by the wider community, it takes a long time. Based on this, it is very clear that what is branding is the face of a company that is important for a business. This is clearly different from marketing that can be done quickly.

    The difference is easy, branding is a way to introduce a company. While marketing is a variety of ways that companies do so that their products sell well.

    If branding is a trick to attract consumer interest, then marketing will complete it using all necessary means, including branding itself. Although different, branding is part of marketing in a wider range.

    Building a company branding is not an easy thing. It takes time and a long process so that the company’s brand can be known by the wider community. Companies that do branding well, the company will automatically get loyalty from consumers.

    Conclusion

    This is a complete explanation of what branding is and how it differs from marketing. Although branding and marketing are closely related in a business, they are two different things. Branding and marketing are one unit. The close relationship between branding and marketing makes both of them a powerful tool in a business.

    Another important thing that must be in business besides branding and marketing is bookkeeping. Because without good and correct bookkeeping, you will not be able to develop your business optimally. This is because you do not have factual data on your business finances.

     

  • What is the difference between Revenue and Income? Here’s the explanation

    What is the difference between Revenue and Income? Here’s the explanation

    Often Confused What is the difference between Revenue and Income? Here’s the explanation –  Without realizing it, usually some financial terms are very often misused in everyday conversation.

    The wrong use of the word sometimes causes confusion for young investors and early entrepreneurs.

    Especially entrepreneurs and investors who do not have a formal basic education about finance.

    One term that is very familiar to hear, but is still very gray in its meaning is revenue and income.

    Most people very often use these terms interchangeably, but sometimes in the wrong context. This term does sound very similar, even from its meaning, but it turns out to be different in the concept of meaning.

    Definition of Revenue

    Revenue, a word that will usually always appear at the very top of the operating income statement. Usually this consists of the total amount of cash generated through the sale of a product or service which is the main operational act for a business.

    The results of the revenue displayed are usually also reduced by existing returns or discounts. In other words, revenue can be explained as the net profit generated by business people in a certain period.

    For example, if you own a food business, your revenue will come from total food sales over a certain period of time (usually calculated on a monthly basis). If you give a discount, then you can subtract the resulting count from the total discount you provide to consumers.

    Apart from that, sometimes some types of businesses may also have alternative sources of income either from investments or the sale of other assets. This fund cannot be counted as revenue because it does not come from the main operations of a business.

    You can enter the total funds generated outside of the main operations into other sections of the income statement.


    Definition of Income

    Income or what is commonly called income or profit earned, turns out to have a different meaning from revenue. In the financial context, income almost always refers to net income.

    It is usually referred to as net income because the amount can represent the total amount of cash remaining from the original amount of income after taking into account all additional costs and revenues that exist.

    Existing costs include cost of goods sold, operating costs such as rent, utilities, salaries, interest paid on debt, depreciation and amortization costs, tax costs; emergency expenses due to extraordinary events such as lawsuits.

    As for additional income, it usually comes from several incomes including interest accumulated on investments or funds originating from the sale of intangible assets or physical assets, such as equipment or bonds.

    For example, if you own a restaurant that generates a net profit of IDR 2,000,000 per day, then in one month you will have IDR 2,000,000 x 30 = IDR 60,000,000 net profit in a month.

    Then you need to pay a rental fee of 5 million per month, raw material costs of Rp. 10,000,000 per month, along with the cost of employees for 5 people, each of which is Rp. 2,000,000 per month.

    If totaled; IDR 5,000,000 + IDR 10,000,000 + IDR 10,000,000 = IDR 25,000,000. Then you can subtract the revenue earned by the costs incurred. So Rp 60,000,000 – Rp 25,000,000 = Rp 35,000,000.

    The total number generated is what we then refer to as income or net profit obtained through a business being run.

    This figure can then be added with several other alternative sources of income as well as a form of income that can be received by a business owner.

    Revenue & Income Difference in Pictures

    Do you understand the difference between revenue and income ? If you’re still confused, here’s an image from Amazon’s 2015 financial report.

    Revenue & Income Difference in Pictures
    Source: Business Insider

     

  • Negotiation: Definition, Objectives, Benefits, and Examples of Negotiation

    Negotiation: Definition, Objectives, Benefits, and Examples of Negotiation

    Negotiation is a form of communication that cannot be separated from human life, both in business activities and daily life. So what exactly is negotiation and what is the purpose of negotiation?

    In this article, we will discuss several things related to negotiations, including:

    • A brief explanation of what is meant by negotiation.
    • General purpose of negotiations.
    • Benefits of negotiation in general.
    • Some basic skills in negotiating.
    • Examples of negotiation activities in everyday life.

    Come on, read this article to the end so that you better understand what negotiation is.

    The Meaning of Negotiation

    Etymologically, the word negotiation comes from the English language, namely “to negotiate” and “to be negotiating” which means to discuss, negotiate, or offer. The word then has another derivative, namely “negotiation” which means the activity of discussing or negotiating something with other parties to reach an agreement.

    According to the origin of the word, negotiation is a strategic discussion process carried out to resolve a problem in a way that is acceptable to the negotiating parties.

    In negotiations, each party tries to persuade the other party to agree on his point of view. By negotiating, all parties involved try to avoid contention but agree to reach some form of compromise.

    So in general, the notion of negotiation is a form of social interaction between several parties that aims to reach a mutual agreement that is considered beneficial to the negotiating parties. People who carry out negotiation activities are called negotiators.

    Negotiation activities are used in various areas of life, and usually involve many people’s problems. For example, in the world of business and organization, activities in these two fields are never separated from the negotiation process.

    The parties involved in negotiations can vary and can cover many things. Here are some examples of negotiation activities in everyday life:

    • Conversations between buyers and sellers in the process of bargaining for goods.
    • The interview process between employers and prospective employees.
    • The process of a business agreement between a company and another company.
    • The process of communication between the government of a country and other countries in bilateral cooperation.

    Negotiation Purpose

    According to the Oxford dictionary, negotiation is a way to reach an agreement through formal discussion. Negotiations are carried out by two or more parties where each party has different goals and a bargaining process occurs to reach an agreement.

    From this explanation, we can understand that in negotiating activities there are goals to be achieved by the negotiating parties. The objectives of the negotiations are as follows:

    1. To reach an agreement that is considered beneficial to all parties.
    2. To solve a problem and find a solution to the problem being faced by the negotiating parties.
    3. To achieve a mutually beneficial condition for the negotiating parties where all benefit (win-win solution) .

    For example, business negotiation activities between a company and another company are very useful in developing a market where the goal is to increase sales figures.

    Another example, the negotiation process also occurs when producers and consumers negotiate the price of a product to set an agreed price. With negotiation activities, sellers and buyers can determine a price that is considered equivalent to the value of a product.

    Negotiation Benefits

    Many people assume that an offer or price is something that is final. In fact, many things that are considered final are in fact flexible or subject to change.

    After understanding the meaning of negotiation and its purpose, we need to know what are the benefits of negotiation. Some of the benefits of negotiation are as follows:

    1. The creation of a network of cooperation between one party with another party to achieve their respective goals.
    2. There is mutual understanding between each negotiating party regarding the agreement to be taken and its impact on all parties.
    3. Negotiation is beneficial for the creation of a mutual agreement that is mutually beneficial for all negotiating parties.
    4. The creation of a positive interaction between the negotiating parties so that the cooperation will produce a wider impact for many people.

    Basic Negotiation Skills

    Before negotiating, all negotiators must understand the philosophy of negotiating. Referring to the notion of negotiation, the basis for negotiating is that the agreement reached benefits all parties, or everyone wins.

    This can be achieved by considering all aspects of the negotiation from various points of view. The basic skills for negotiating are as follows:

    1. Sharp in thinking.
    2. Be patient in action.
    3. Can adapt well.
    4. Have endurance.
    5. Good socialization skills .
    6. Good concentration ability.
    7. Have articulation skills.
    8. Have a good sense of humour.

    In addition, there are several crucial things that negotiators must pay attention to when conducting the negotiation process, including:

    • In expressing an opinion, it must be accompanied by clear reasons, facts, or examples so that it is easily understood by other parties.
    • Opinions must be conveyed with the appropriate volume, intonation and choice of words.
    • Expression of opinion must be done clearly, smoothly, and politely.
    • It is not easy to accept or reject the opinion of other parties but must go through various considerations.

    Key Factors in Negotiations

    There are several main elements or factors that must be considered in the negotiation process. Quoted from Investopedia.com, the following are some of the main factors in negotiations:

    1. The Parties Involved

    We must know who will be participating in the negotiations, and what are their interests? It is also important to know the background of the parties involved and how this affects their position in the negotiation process.

    2. Relationship

    Next, we also need to know what the relationship between the parties and their intermediaries is in the negotiation process. How are the parties connected and what role do they play in the negotiation process?

    3. Communication

    This relates to the interests of the negotiators can be well communicated to secure their agreement through negotiations? What is the most effective way to deliver the desired result? How can negotiators be sure they are being heard?

    4. Alternative

    Is there any alternative to what one of the parties originally wanted? If direct agreement is not possible, do the parties need to look for other alternatives?

    5. Realistic Options

    What options are possible to achieve a result? Have the negotiators suggested that there might be some flexibility in their demands?

    6. Legitimate Claims

    Are the requests and promises of each party valid? What evidence do the negotiators offer to support their claims and demonstrate that their claims are valid? How will they guarantee that they will follow through on the outcome of the negotiations?

    Conclusion

    From the explanation above, we can conclude that the definition of negotiation is a strategic discussion activity involving two or more parties to reach a final agreement that is agreed by all parties involved.

    In practice, one of the parties will put forward his point of view, while the other will accept the conditions offered or refuse by conveying his own point of view. This process continues until both parties agree on a resolution.

    Thus a brief explanation of negotiation, starting from its meaning, objectives, benefits, and basic skills needed in negotiating. Hopefully this article is useful and adds to your insight.

  • Understanding Market Share: Definition, Importance, and Metrics

    Understanding Market Share: Definition, Importance, and Metrics

    As we know, market share is a very determining factor for the success of a business. Then actually, what is the meaning of market share , and what is its purpose?

    The answer is in this article. Here I will discuss in detail several things related to market share , including:

    • A brief explanation of what market share is .
    • Types of market shares .
    • Measuring the company’s success in market share .
    • What is the purpose of market share analysis ?
    • How to find out the market size.
    • How to increase market share .
    • Advantages and disadvantages of market share.

    If you want to know more about market share, you will definitely like reading this article. Let’s get started!

    Understanding Market Share

    The term market share is an English word consisting of two words, namely market and share .

    According to the origin of the word, the word market means market, while the word share means part, share, and share. In simple terms, the notion of market share is the part of the market that is controlled by a particular company or product.

    So, the notion of market share is part of the entire demand for an item that reflects the consumer group based on its characteristics (market segment) . Classification of consumers can be grouped based on income level, age, gender, education, and social status.

    So, market share is the part of the market controlled by a company from all potential sales, generally expressed as a percentage (%).

    Market share can also be defined as the percentage of total sales of a company’s products from all sources, divided by the total sales of products (goods and services) in a particular industry.

    simple example,

    If consumers as a whole buy 100 shampoo products, and 35% of those purchases come from XYZ company, then XYZ company manages to control 35% market share.

    Types of Market Share

    Market share can be divided into two types. The following are the types of market share and examples:

    1. Main Market (Primary Market)

    The primary market is the market in which securities are created. In this market, companies sell new stocks and bonds to the public for the first time.

    An initial public offering (IPO) is an example of a primary market. In this trade, investors have the opportunity to buy securities from a bank that does initial underwriting for certain shares.

    An IPO occurs when a private company issues shares to the public for the first time.

    2. Secondary Market

    The secondary market is the market where investors buy and sell securities they already own. This market is called by most people the “stock market”, although shares are actually sold on the primary market when they are first issued.

    The national exchange, such as the Stock Exchange, is an example of a secondary market.

    Measuring Company Success in Market Share

    Market share is the percentage of sales recorded by a company of the total sales of its competitors combined in a given industry.

    That is, market share is one of the indicators used by a company in measuring their level of success against their competitors.

    For example, company XYZ in 2008 had a target market share of 10% of the total market. To reach the target market, a promotion fee of Rp. 100 million is needed.

    If after marketing it turns out that XYZ’s market share is more than 10% (eg 15%), it means that the company’s performance is going well.

    On the other hand, if in that year the market share obtained was only 9%, then it shows that the marketing performance is not good and the company will face efficiency and effectiveness problems.

    There are several factors that need to be explored in assessing the problem of companies that are not able to achieve market share, namely:

    • The size of the market share is too high.
    • There are more and more new competitors in the same industry.
    • There is a decline in the competitiveness of the company.
    • Promotions that cannot reach the target market or are not on target.

    Purpose of Market Share Analysis

    After knowing what market share is, of course we also have to know what the purpose of market share analysis is.

    In general, a company’s market share can be used as an indicator of the company’s competitiveness in a market. So, the goal is to find out how well the company is performing and growing against its competitors.

    This metric can also be used to measure changes in sales revenue so as to assist companies in evaluating primary demand in a market.

    Usually the growth in sales levels that comes from primary demand will make it cheaper and will benefit the company, rather than the market gained from taking part in competitors in the same industry.

    Meanwhile, the loss experienced in a market share is an indication of a major problem in the long term. This requires a change in the marketing strategy used.

    Any business or company that has a below-average market share will likely not be able to survive the competition. This is because the trend of market share and sales of the company’s products is also an early indicator of opportunities or problems that may arise in the future.

    Based on research, market share is an asset that is needed by every company. However, many economists say that market share is not the goal or basic criterion of an economic policy.

    That way, market share can only be used as the main basis for measuring the performance of companies that are competing in a market.

    Market share can be used as a reference for building a company system, both in formulating and making policies. And of course the policy is made based on considerations related to the impact of each policy on the market share of the company’s competitors.

    How to Know Market Size

    In order to know and determine the size of the market and its market share , a fairly in-depth market research is needed. Therefore, entrepreneurs usually define the market to be targeted so that they can see the potential of the market.

    Furthermore, after knowing the size of the market and knowing the targeted market segment, the next step is to study who the competitors in the market are and how many markets they have mastered.

    Companies that make strategic plans must develop marketing mix strategies, and narrow product segmentation so that promotions are right on target.

    As an example,

    Company XYZ which is in the beverage industry. It’s not enough to just explain that the business is drinks, but it must be more focused.

    For example, coffee drinks, tea, fruit flavors, and so on.

    How to Increase Market Share

    Understanding the meaning of market share is important. The reason is, by knowing the target market share, a company can understand its strengths and weaknesses and can anticipate the market.

    Understanding the advantages and disadvantages of a company can be done with a SWOT analysis . That way, a company can do various things needed to increase productivity.

    For example, changing prices, changing services, increasing marketing promotions, changing distribution methods , and so on.

    Then how to increase market share when a company starts a trading business. Quoted from various sources, here are brief tips from business people:

    1. Choosing a business that is still relatively new and has not many competitors from other companies.
    2. Have confidence that the company will be successful in the business it runs.
    3. Determine the company’s vision and mission regarding future business targets.
    4. Take into account the strength of competitors in the same industry.
    5. Pay attention to price movements in the targeted industry and determine the most suitable price.
    6. Creating and building a market network so that the business becomes bigger.

    Conclusion

    From the explanation above, it can be concluded that market share is the portion of the market that is owned or controlled by a particular company or product.

    The percentage of market share is used to measure the competitiveness of a company in a particular industry. That way, the company can see how well it is performing and developing against competitors.

    Thus a brief explanation of the meaning of market share or market share, how to find out market size, objectives, types, and how to increase market share. Hopefully this short review is useful and adds to your insight.

  • Definition of Radicalism, History, Characteristics, Causes of Radicalism

    Definition of Radicalism, History, Characteristics, Causes of Radicalism

    What does radicalism actually mean? In simple terms, the notion of radicalism is an understanding that requires extreme changes or changes to a system of society to its roots.

    Radicalism is one of the social problems that haunts people’s lives in  the world. The existence of globalization is one of the triggers for the emergence of radicalism understanding or ideology, both in social and political life.

    Currently, radicalism is often associated with the concepts of terrorism and extremism. In fact, there are many definitions of radicalism, depending on the context discussed.

    Definition of Radicalism

    The word radicalism comes from the Latin word radix which means root. This term is intended for the basics, the fundamental principles, the subject matter, and the essence of various phenomena.

    there are three meanings of radicalism. First, radicalism is a radical sect or understanding in politics, second, radicalism is a school or understanding that requires drastic social and political changes, and third, radicalism is a political school that has an extreme attitude.

    Meanwhile, according to Merriam Webster’s online dictionary, radicalism is the behavior or opinion of people who want or like extreme changes in the government or political system.

    In the socio-political concept, radicalism is an ideology that wants change, replacement, and penetration of a community system to its roots.

    the term radical does not always have a negative meaning but can also have a positive meaning, depending on the context of space and time behind the use of the term. So, basically, radicalism refers to the political doctrine adopted by certain parties who support individual and collective freedom.

    According to experts, the notion of radicalism is an ideology (idea or idea) and an understanding that wants to make changes to the social and political system by using violent/extreme means.

    The essence of acts of radicalism are the attitudes and actions of a particular person or group that uses extreme and even violent means in bringing about the desired change.

    Radical groups generally want these changes in a short time and drastically which is often contrary to the prevailing social system.

    Radicalism is often associated with terrorism because radical groups can use any means to achieve their wishes, including terrorizing those who disagree with them.

    Although many associate radicalism with certain religions, fundamentally radicalism is a political issue and not a religious teaching.

    History of Radicalism

    Radicalism has existed since time immemorial because the “seeds” are already in humans. According to the Encyclopedia Britanica, the term radicalism was first recognized after Charles James Fox described the notion in 1797.

    At that time, Charles James Fox called for “Radical Reforms” in the system of government in Great Britain (England). These reforms were used to explain the movement in favor of a parliamentary revolution in the country. In the end the ideology of radicalism began to develop and then mingled with the ideology of liberalism.

    In France prior to 1848, the use of the term radical referred to those who supported universal or republican suffrage. Entering the 19th century, the term radicalism changed its meaning to humans who can control the social environment with collective action.

    Meanwhile in America, the definition of radicalism is political extremism in any form. Communism is considered a radical left, and fascism is considered a radical right. American youth movements that denounced traditional social and political values ​​at the time were called radicals.

    Radicalism is often associated with certain religions, especially Islam. One example can be seen from the existence of the ISIS (Islamic State of Iraq and Syria) group which wants to change the world order by means of violence and terror by bringing/mentioning symbols of the Islamic religion in their every action.

    The actions of ISIS and the support of a small number of Muslims against ISIS were then considered a true form of radicalism. This in the end makes some people of the world think ISIS is a picture of Islamic teachings. However, of course this is not true because most Muslims actually condemn the heinous acts carried out by the ISIS group.

    Characteristics of Radicalism

    Radicalism is very easy to recognize. This is because in general, adherents of this ideology want to be known and want more support from people. That is why radicalism always uses extreme means.

    The following are the characteristics of radicalism:

    1. Radicalism is a response to current conditions, the response is then manifested in the form of evaluation, rejection, and even hard resistance.
    2. Making constant resistance efforts and demanding the desired drastic changes occur.
    3. People who embrace radicalism usually have strong beliefs about the program they want to run.
    4. Adherents of radicalism do not hesitate to use violent means in realizing their wishes.
    5. Adherents of radicalism have the assumption that all parties who have different views with him are guilty.

    Factors Causing Radicalism

    Referring to the definition of radicalism above, this understanding can occur due to several factors, including:

    1. Thinking Factor.  Radicalism can develop because of the idea that everything must be returned to religion, even if in a rigid and violent way.
    2. Economic Factors . Economic problems also play a role in making radicalism appear in various countries. It is human nature to survive, and when pressed by economic problems, humans can do anything, including terrorizing other humans.
    3. Political Factors . Some people think that a state leader only sided with certain parties, resulting in the emergence of community groups that seem to want to uphold justice. These groups can be from social, religious, or political groups. Instead of upholding justice, these groups often make things worse.
    4. Social Factors . Still closely related to economic factors. Some of the weak economic class people are generally narrow-minded so it is easy to believe in radical figures because they are considered to be able to bring drastic changes to their lives.
    5. Psychological Factors. Bitter events in one’s life can also be a factor causing radicalism. Economic problems, family problems, love problems, hatred and revenge, all of these have the potential to make someone a radical.
    6. Education Factor . Wrong education is a factor causing the emergence of radicals in various places, especially religious education. Educators who give teachings in the wrong way can cause radicalism in a person.

    Advantages and Disadvantages of Radicalism

    Don’t get me wrong, since the beginning of this article, it has been stated that radicalism is a misunderstanding and many consider it heretical. However, in radicalism there are also advantages.

    1. Advantages

    • Adherents of radicalism have a clear goal and are very sure of that goal.
    • Adherents of radicalism have great loyalty and fighting spirit in realizing their goals.

    2. Weaknesses

    • Adherents of radicalism cannot see the real reality because they think that all opposing opinions are wrong.
    • They generally use violence and other negative methods in an effort to achieve their goals.
    • Adherents of radicalism consider all parties who have different views with him are enemies who must be eliminated.
    • Adherents of radicalism do not care about human rights (Human Rights).

    This is a brief explanation of the meaning of radicalism, the history of radicalism, the characteristics of radicalism, and the causes of radicalism in various places. Hopefully this article is useful and adds to your insight.

  • Echinoderms

    Echinoderms

    Echinoderms come from the words echinos and derma. Echinos means thorn, derma means skin. Thus, echinoderms are animals that have spines on their skin. Live in marine habitats. The outside of the body is very hard, composed of lime / chitin. It has five arms radially and symmetrically.

    Has the ability autotomy, namely the ability to cut off a body part (usually the arm) if it feels threatened and can grow it back into its original shape. Including triploblastic coelomate animals, which have a true body cavity composed of 3 layers of tissue, namely ectoderm, mesoderm, and endoderm.

    The movement of Echinoderms uses an amburacral system, namely arm movements occur due to changes in water pressure in the water vessel system. In addition to moving, the amburacral system in echinoderms is also used to catch prey and breathe. The following is the mechanism of movement of the amburacral system carried out by Echinoderms:

    1. At the top of the body of Echinoderms there is a hole called the madreporite which is equipped with a filter (pore).
    2. The water enters the madreporite hole into the ring channel and will be dispersed into the tube foot radial channel
    3. Water is sprayed on the tube feet to create hydraulic pressure so the tube feet can stick out.
    4. This causes the ampulla to attach to other substrates and allows Echinoderms to move and move.

    The digestive system consists of the mouth (below the body), esophagus, stomach, intestines, and anus (located above the body). The nervous system consists of a ring of nerves that surrounds the mouth and has 5 branches on each arm. The sexes are separated and reproduction is done by external fertilization (fertilization occurs outside the body).

    After fertilization occurs, a zygote will form and develop into ciliated larvae (bipinnaria) that can swim and become adults if they are in a suitable habitat.

    Classification, Body Structure, and Examples of Echinoderms

    Based on their characteristics, Phylum Echinoderms are divided into 5 classes, namely:

    1. Asteroidea (starfish)

    Body shape like a star. Lives in coastal habitats. It has five short, blunt spiked arms on the surface of its body. The locomotion is an ambulacral leg. The body is divided into the oral side or the lower side (where the mouth) and the aboral side or the upper side (where the anus).

    The outermost surface layer is composed of a layer of ciliated epidermal cells and has an endoskeleton underneath. Examples of Asteroidea are Culcita (skinned starfish), Linkia laevigata (blue starfish), Pentaceros (horned starfish), Astrias vulgaris (large starfish), and Ctenodiscus (mud starfish).

    Astrias vulgaris
    Astrias vulgaris
    Image source: gulfofme.com

    2. Ophiuroidea

    Often referred to as the snake star because it has long arms and moves like a snake. Its habitat is in deep and shallow sea waters, especially behind rocks or buried in sand. Has a madreporite which is located on the bottom (mouth) and does not have an anus, so that the rest of the food is expelled through the mouth. Examples of Ophiuroidea are Ophiothrix fragillis and Ophiopholis aculeata.

    Micro brittle starfish and Caulerpa racemosa
    Micro brittle starfish and Caulerpa racemosa

    3. Crinoid

    Shaped like a lily (sea lilies) and has five forked arms. Its life attaches to the substrate and forms colonies so that it looks like a marine garden. Under unfavorable conditions, Crinoidea will escape from the substrate and move to another place. Lacking madreporite, mouth and anus are located in the oral cavity. In the aboral there is a calyx, which is a chalk slab shaped like a cup. An example of Crinoidea is Antedon sp. and Holopus sp.

    Crinoid on the reef of Batu Moncho Island, Indonesia
    Crinoid on the reef of Batu Moncho Island, Indonesia

    4. Echinoidea

    Often referred to as sea urchins. Lives in sand and rocks. It has no arms, is circular in shape, slightly flattened, and the body surface is surrounded by many spines. The mouth and 5 teeth are in the oral part, while the anus, genital opening, and are in the aboral part. Examples of Echinoidea are Diadema saxsatile (sea urchins) and Echinothrix sp. (sea urchin).

    Tripneustes ventricosus and Echinometra viridis
    Echinometra viridis

    5. Holothuroidea

    Often referred to as sea cucumber. Lives in sand or lime. It has a soft body, smooth spines, and is shaped like an elongated sac. The mouth is anterior, while the anus is posterior. Examples of Holothuroidea are Holothuria scabra, and Thyone byereus (sea cucumber).

    A sea cucumber (Actinopyga echinites), displaying its feeding tentacles and tube feet
    A sea cucumber (Actinopyga echinites), displaying its feeding tentacles and tube feet

    Echinoderms Reproduction

    Echinoderms reproduce both sexually and asexually. Sexually, by external fertilization (fertilization is outside the body of the parent) and produces bilaterally symmetrical larvae that attach to the substrate to grow into new echinoderms. Asexually, namely by dividing body parts or fragmentation and regeneration of lost body parts.

  • Types of Electrical Components and How They Work: A Comprehensive Review

    Types of Electrical Components and How They Work: A Comprehensive Review

    Any electronic device that is used today turns out to have the smallest components in it. Where each component certainly has its own type and function. More or less that’s the picture of the electrical components.

    Well, the electrical components contained in electronic objects themselves are called circuits. For example, there is a component in a cell phone that is used to capture signals.

    Types of Electrical Components

    For a more complete explanation, here is an explanation of the types of electrical components and their functions that you need to know.

    The types of electrical components that are important for you to know are:

    1. Battery
    2. Transistor
    3. Transformer
    4. Microcontroller
    5. Resistor
    6. Inductor
    7. Capacitor
    8. Switch
    9. Diode

    Electrical circuits are used to conduct conductive electric current in electronic components. Its function is very important, namely so that electronic devices can turn on and function properly. There are two types of components, namely active and passive components.

    While the type and function of the circuit will be discussed in more detail below.

    1. Battery 

    Battery 

    The electrical component of the battery is a component for storing chemical energy which will be converted into electricity in electronic devices.

    You could say this component is very easy to find in electronic devices. For example like in cell phones, radios, watches and so on.

    2. Transistor 

    Transistor 

    The electrical component that is the main component in electronic devices is the transistor . Because one of the components of the transistor will amplify, control, direct, modulator, oscillator and much more for the quality of electricity.

    3. Transformer

    Transformer

    The electrical component of the transformer is one of the electrical components so that the AC voltage can go up and down. This condition will produce very clear sound, images, and so on.

    Examples of its use can be found in household electrical power .

    4. Microcontroller 

    Microcontroller 

    The electrical component of the microcontroller is a component to carry out certain tasks in electronics. Of course it depends on the type of tool itself. Well, the microcontroller is often called an IC or integrated circuit .

    Microcontroller is almost the same as a sensor for measuring electrical quantities in electronics. Where this sensor will process various kinds of information captured through signals.

    5. Resistors

    Resistors

    The electrical component of the resistor has the main function of regulating the electric current in the electronic device so that it is stable and safe.

    This component is also passive and can limit the electric current.

    6. Inductors

    Inductors

    One of the most important electrical components is the inductor. Components that will form coils in electronic devices. The shape of this component is an arrangement of wire turns on top of the circuit.

    7. Capacitor 

    Capacitor 

    A capacitor is a type of electrical component that functions to store current. The time to save it is quite limited. This is because the electrical component of the capacitor has a certain material whose active power is also limited.

    8. Switch

    Switch

    The external electrical components of electronic devices are switches , fuses and button switch buttons. These three components main function is to turn on or break the current in electrical or electronic devices. This component is also used to protect the electrical voltage.

    9. Diode 

    Diode

    The electrical component of the diode is one of the active components in electronic circuits. This component is able to conduct or inhibit electric current from the opposite direction. The materials used are semiconductor materials .

    Conclusion

    Thus a discussion of the meaning of electrical components. Starting from the types of components to examples of electronic devices that contain components, you can see above. Hope it helps you to get to know each component type and its function better, huh?

  • Rotary Evaporator : Working Principle, Use and Function

    Rotary Evaporator : Working Principle, Use and Function

    Rotary Evaporator: Working Principles, Uses, and Functions – In testing chemical substances, generally, we will carry out several reaction activities.

    The reaction activity is carried out, of course, with a specific purpose, such as accelerating reactions, separating substances, dissolving chemicals, evaporating, concentrating, etc.

    Evaporation is included in it, which by definition Evaporation or evaporation is the process of changing water molecules into gas.

    Yes, the purpose of using an evaporator is to vaporize a solution.

    Here’s the full explanation:

    Rotary Evaporator: Working Principle, Use and Function

    Work principle

    Broadly speaking, the Evaporator evaporates the solution, separating the substance from the solvent.

    The working principle of a rotary evaporator is to heat the solution in one of the containers (evaporation flask), which is warmed in a water bath, because of the difference in boiling point between the substance and the solvent (e.g., ether, methanol, etc.), the substance with a lower boiling point will evaporate.

    The vaporized gas will be trapped by the condenser, which, with the help of cold pressure and temperature, will re-liquid the gas, return to a solution, and be accommodated in a receiving flask.

    In the end, two separate liquids will be formed: a concentrated solution and a solvent which generally already contains the dissolved test substance.

    Of course, this is a big picture of the working principle of a rotary evaporator; the rest depends on the use and testing in each laboratory.

    Usage and Function

    The use of a Rotary Evaporator can be very diverse, but the function remains the same, namely separating two solutions with different boiling points.

    First Test Example (#1)

    For example, if you concentrate, you can use a Rotary Evaporator to evaporate other substances that you did not test.

    The concentration of a general solution is done to get a high concentration of the substance we will test.

    Because of this, a Rotary Evaporator can evaporate other substances you would not be testing.

    Of course, with the difference in boiling points, there will be two separate solutions, and you can test the substance concentrated in the Evaporating Flask.

    Second Test Example (#2)

    If, in your first example, you focused on the substance being concentrated, this time, you will be testing the vaporized substance.

    The working principle is more or less like this:

    The substance you are going to test is dissolved in a solvent such as ether, for example, so that the solvent is already bound to the test substance to be evaporated.

    By using a water bath and rotating the rotator, the solvent (ether) with varying boiling points can be evaporated and collected in the condenser.

    With the help of cold temperatures and air pressure, the gas trapped in the condenser will melt again and be accommodated in the reservoir flask.

    So that finally, it forms two solutions, namely the initial solution and the solvent, which already contains the test substance that you will analyze.

    Tool Parts

    Seeing the shape that may be quite complex, the Rotary Evaporator consists of several parts.

    Here are some of the parts needed to run the tool.

    Heating Bath

    This section is used to warm the liquid in the evaporation flask.

    Instead of using a fired heater which may be dangerous, a water bath can be an alternative solution for providing heat to the solution to be evaporated.

    Rotator

    The rotator is used to rotate the evaporation flask so that it heats evenly and creates a kinetic movement that makes evaporation more effective.

    Without a circular motion, the solution in it may not evaporate completely.

    Condenser

    This glass device is used to ‘trap’ the air coming out of the evaporating flask with a winding air duct.

    In the condenser, manipulation occurs with the addition of cold temperatures and pressure so that the gas, which was originally going to rise to the top, becomes liquid again.

    Receiving Flask

    This glass tool is used to accommodate the recovered gas from the condenser.

    Later this flask contains a solvent that may contain the substance you are testing.

    Vacuum Pump

    This tool is applied to the condenser, increasing the air pressure, thereby slowing the gas’s movement.

    Circulator Chiller

    This tool is also applied to the condenser to introduce cold air.

  • 3 Basic Investment Principles from Warren Buffett

    3 Basic Investment Principles from Warren Buffett

    Warren Buffett is a legendary investor and billionaire who is greatly admired in the United States and throughout the world. Not surprisingly, his experience and business principles have inspired a number of billionaires, investors, and CEOs from a number of companies in the United States and even in the world.

    For example, like Marc Andreessen, he is a venture capitalist and Silicon Valley technology legend. No wonder because Warren Buffett’s business is also diverse, for example being an investor in various giant companies.

    His investment strategy requires investors not only to explore the latest news, but also to focus on the company’s fundamentals when deciding where to allocate their funds.

    Warren Buffett’s Basic Investing Principles

    Here are a number of investment principles that are owned by the 5th richest man in the world, including:

    1. Know What You Want To Invest

    Avoid investing in businesses you don’t understand. Warren Buffett says, if an investor should stick to what they know. When he wants to invest he only buys shares in a business that he understands and how the business will make money in the future.

    This is evidenced by the portfolio of shares owned such as Apple, American Express and Coca-Cola, these three companies are proven to continue to grow and generate profits for shareholders.

    According to him, most investors are usually trapped in the profits of initial offering shares. Then release the shares because they hold on to investment profits.

    He suggested that investors summarize businesses that have the opportunity to continue to grow in the future, have a certain market or are needed by many people and then collect their shares. Examples include drinking water companies, technology stocks to luxury fashion brands.

    2. Selling and Buying Quality Stocks

    Another basic principle of Warren Buffett ‘s investment is to sell and buy quality stocks. He said it is better to buy a good company at a reasonable price, compared to a standard company, but has an expensive price.

    Investors must understand well what the company is doing and know the amount of money that must be paid to own the shares. His initial investment strategy was to buy stocks at very low prices.

    The quality of the stock is not so important if the price is cheap, so he believes he can still make money. However, his focus changed, and he ended up buying strong and competitive stocks.

    By their nature, such companies are less common and are generally more valued. He believes that after finding a good company, active investors should invest large sums of money.

    Although it takes time, investors must believe that the company whose shares are collected will be able to collect income in the coming years.

    3. Long Term

    Warren Buffett also says, if you don’t think about owning a stock for 10 years, don’t think about owning it for 10 minutes. With so many fast news every day, there is a tendency for investors to have to react to everything.

    But he did not agree with this. He thought that indolence was the key to increasing wealth. This is what makes him think, his favorite hold period is the long term.

    Although occasionally selling shares, he never relinquished all of his holdings. For example, when he first invested in Coca-Cola in the 1980s, he still holds the stock. As Warren Buffett has explained before, you have to know what you are investing in.

  • What is Microcontroller

    What is Microcontroller

    you certainly don’t know a tool called this microcontroller.

    It can be said that this microcontroller is a chip that has an important role in programming in various electronic devices.

    In this article, we will discuss the understanding of microcontrollers, working principles, structures, block diagrams, advantages, disadvantages, types, functions and differences. For that, see the discussion below.

    What is Microcontroller

    What is Microcontroller

    Microcontroller is a small computer that is packaged in the form of an IC (Integrated Circuit) chip and is designed to perform certain tasks or operations.

    Generally a microcontroller IC consists of one or more processor cores (CPU), memory (RAM and ROM) and programmable input and output devices.

    In its application, the micro controller which in English is called the microcontroller  is used in products or devices that are controlled automatically.

    Examples include car engine control systems, remote controls, medical devices and devices that use other embedded systems.

    The use of this microcontroller is increasingly popular because of its ability to reduce the size and cost of a product or design when compared to designs built using microprocessors with memory and separate input and output devices.

    Microcontroller Working Principle

    Microcontroller Working Principle

    After discussing the meaning of the microcontroller, then the next thing is that there is a working principle.

    Microcontroller is used as a controller or controller of a system. In carrying out these functions, these components require the support of other parts such as those incorporated in the microcontroller IC.

    Depending on the function and purpose, any incoming data or commands are then processed in the CPU section. The processing is assisted by other parts such as timers, RAM, CDA or ADC.

    Difference Between Microcontroller and Microprocessor

    Difference Between Microcontroller and Microprocessor

    Microcontroller is an IC component that performs the controlling function. It contains other components.

    Examples such as ADC, RAM, CDA and many more. The data processing center of the microcontroller is called the CPU.

    While the microprocessor is the CPU (Control Processing Unit) itself, so the history of the microprocessor can be referred to as part of the microcontroller.

    This microprocessor has components such as ALU (Aritmati Logic Unit), registers, control unit and interconnected CPU.

    To better understand how it works, you can see the image of the microprocessor block diagram above.

    Microcontroller Block Diagram and Structure

    Microcontroller Block Diagram and Structure

    The following is the structure and block diagram of the microcontroller along with an explanation of its main parts.

    1. CPU

    CPU is the brain of the microcontroller. The CPU is responsible for fetching instructions (fetch), decoding them (decode), then finally executing (execute).

    The CPU connects every part of the microcontroller into one system. Its main function is to retrieve and decode instructions.

    Instructions taken from program memory must be decoded or decoded by the CPU.

    2. Serial Port (Serial Port)

    The serial port provides various serial interfaces between the microcontroller and other peripherals such as the parallel port.

    3. Memory (Storage)

    This memory is in charge of storing data. The data is data that has been processed (output) or data that has not been processed (input).

    This storage is in the form of RAM and ROM. ROM is used to store data for a long period of time.

    While RAM is used to store data temporarily while the program is running until it is finally moved to ROM.

    As for some parts of RAM, including:

    • Contact point
    • Packaging chips
    • CSP (Chip Scale Package)
    • DIP (Dual In-Line Package)
    • PCB (Printed Circuit Board)
    • TSOP (Thin Small Outline Package)
    • DRAM (Dynamic Random Access Memory)

    4. Parallel Input/Output Port

    Parallel input/output ports are used to drive or connect various devices such as LEDs , LCDs , printers, memory and other input/output devices to the microcontroller.

    5. ADC (Analog to Digital Converter)

    ADC converter (Analog to Digital Converter) is used to convert analog signals to digital form.

    The input signal in this converter must be in analog form (eg output from a sensor) while the output is in digital form.

    Digital outputs can be used for various digital applications such as digital displays in measuring devices.

    6. DAC (Digital to Analog Converter)

    DAC (Digital to Analog Converter) performs the ADC (Analog to Digital Converter) conversion reversal operation.

    The DAC converts the digital signal into an analog format. This DAC is usually used to control analog devices such as DC motors and so on.

    7. Interrupt Control

    Interrupt Control is in charge of controlling delays in microcontroller programming.

    The interrupt control section can be operated internally or externally.

    8. Special Functioning Block

    The special functioning block is an additional part that is made to have a special function.

    Usually this block is found in the microcontroller architecture in robotics machines. Not all devices use this section.

    9. Timer and Counter

    This timer/counter is used for measuring time and counting tools. The existence of this component is very important.

    Because time information is often used to make system settings more accurate and effective.

    Advantages and Disadvantages of Microcontroller

    After the previous admin explained about the definition of a microcontroller, working principles, differences, structure and block diagrams, then there are advantages and disadvantages that you can know.

    The main advantages of the microcontroller:

    • The time required to perform the operation is low.
    • Easily connect additional RAM, ROM and I/O ports.
    • Most pins can be programmed by the user to perform various functions.
    • Can reduce the cost and size of the system, due to complete integration in a microcontroller.
    • The microcontroller acts as a microcomputer without the need for any additional digital components.
    • The use of the microcontroller is simple and easy for troubleshooting and system maintenance.

    Disadvantages of the microcontroller:

    • Most are only used in micro-equipment.
    • Cannot connect with high power devices directly.
    • Microcontrollers have a more complex architecture than microprocessors.
    • Only execute a limited number of times at the same time.

    Microcontroller Types

    Microcontrollers are divided into several types according to their function. The types of microcontrollers include:

    1. AVR Microcontroller

    AVR microcontroller is a type of 8 bit RISC microcontroller. This type is included in the RISC, so all the instruction code will be packaged in a clock cycle.

    AVR is the most common type of microcontroller used in electronics and instrumentation.

    This microcontroller is a type of microcontroller architecture that is the mainstay of Atmel. This architecture is specially designed by offering various advantages and improvements from the existing microcontroller architecture.

    Atmel has produced various series of AVR microcontrollers and has been marketed worldwide as a microcontroller with low cost and high performance characteristics.

    the AVR microcontroller has been widely used, because it offers a very complete range of features, is easy to obtain and has an affordable price.

    2. MSC 51 . Microcontroller

    The MSC 51 type microcontroller is included in the CISC family where almost all instructions will be executed at 12 clock cycles.

    This type of microcontroller uses the Harvard architecture and was originally designed specifically for single-chip microcontroller applications.

    However, the expansion mode allows an external 64 kb ROM and an external 64 kb RAM to be addressed by means of a separate chip selection path for program access and data memory.

    One of the advantages of the 8051 microcontroller is the inclusion of a boolean processing engine which allows bit-level boolean logic operations to be performed efficiently in internal registers and RAM.

    Therefore, MCS51 is often used in early PLC designs. MCS51 is an atmel production which is divided into 2 versions, namely a 20 foot version and a 40 foot version.

    Almost all types of MCS51 microcontrollers are equipped with PEROM flash (Programmable Eraseable Read Only Memory) as program memory media and the arrangement of these IC legs reaches each version.

    3. PIC Microcontroller

    PIC stands for Programmable Interface Controller. But along with its development, it underwent a change into a Programmable Intelligent Computer.

    PIC is a type of RISC type microcontroller where this microcontroller uses the Harvard architecture that has been made by microchip technology.

    It was first developed by the general instrument microelectronic division which has the name PIC1640.

    PIC microcontroller is a single circuit that has a small size and contains memory processing units, clocks and inputs or outputs in a single unit.

    This PIC can be purchased blank which is then added with a certain control program.

    This PIC is very popular among developers and hobbyists, because the cost is fairly cheap.

    Wide availability and use, large application databases and programming via serial port connections that exist on a computer.

    4. ARM . Microcontroller

    The microcontroller is a processor with a 32-bit RISC family of instruction set architecture that has been developed by ARM holdings.

    ARM (Advanced RISC Machine) was previously known as the Acorn RISC Machine.

    Initially, the ARM Processor was developed by PCs or personal computers by Acorn Computers.

    However, with the dominance of the Intel x86 Microsoft process on compatible IBM PCs, Acorn Computer has gone out of business.

    Microcontroller Function

    As for some of the main functions of the microcontroller, including:

    • As a counter
    • As a flip-flop
    • As an oscillation generator
    • As a decoder and encoder
    • As a timer or timer
    • As ADC (Analog to Digital Converter)

    Thus an explanation of the definition of a microcontroller, working principle, structure, block diagram, advantages, disadvantages, types, functions and differences. Hopefully it can be useful for all of us. Bye bye, thank you

  • The History of Sa’i Between the Hills of Safa and Marwah and its Meaning

    The History of Sa’i Between the Hills of Safa and Marwah and its Meaning

    Did you know there is an interesting story about the  history of sa’i  or jogging between Bukit Shafa and Marwah which is a chain of umrah and hajj?

    One of the pillars in performing Umrah and Hajj is Sa’i. The worship of Sa’i is one of the pillars of Umrah and Hajj which is performed by jogging or walking hurriedly between Shafa Hill and Marwah which is 405 meters apart seven times.

    The Sa’i procession is carried out from the hill of Safa. While in Safa, the congregation should climb up the hill towards Marwah and then face the Kaaba. Sa’i worship which is currently carried out by pilgrims and Umrah has its own history and meaning. To find out more about the history and meaning of sa’i worship, here is an explanation.

    Story of Sa’i History: Siti Hajar, Prophet Ibrahim AS, and Prophet Ismail AS

    The history of sa’i cannot be separated from the story of the wife of Prophet Ibrahim who is also the mother of Prophet Ismail, namely Siti Hajar. The history of sa’i between  Mount Safa and Marwah  began when Siti Hajar tried to find water for her thirsty son Ismail.

    At that time, Nab Ibrahim was ordered by Allah SWT to leave his wife and also his child in a very barren desert. Siti Hajar who felt confused and sad about her husband’s departure plan asked  “Where are you going Ibrahim?” .

    Hearing the question from his wife, Prophet Ibrahim did not answer and remained silent. Then Siti Hajar added “Is it up to you Ibrahim to leave us both in a lonely and barren place like this?”.

    Ibrahim still did not answer and did not turn his head at all. Then Siti Hajar said again, “Is this an order from Allah SWT?”. At that moment, Prophet Ibrahim answered, “Yes”. Hearing the answer, Siti Hajar’s heart became calmer. Then later Siti Hajar said again, “If that is true, surely God will never waste our fate.”.

    Prophet Ibrahim then left Siti Hajar and Ismail by providing them with food and drink. However, the provisions given by Ibrahim eventually ran out. Siti Hajar then tried to find water for her son.

    From where she was, Siti Hajar saw a hill, namely Bukit Shafa. He then rushed to find water towards the top of Bukit Shafa, but there was nothing. It didn’t find anything. Then he rushed down towards Bukit Marwah, but nil too. Siti Hajar returned again to Bukit Shafa, and returned again to Bukit Marwah. And so on up to seven times.

    After seven times rushing from Safa to Marwah and vice versa, from Bukit Marwah Siti Hajar heard the sound of gurgling water. He then approached the direction of the voice. How surprised he was when he found jets of water rushing out of the ground under the soles of Prophet Ismail’s feet.

    Now the water is then called zamzam water. And until now,  the water of zam-zam  has never receded or dried up. The Arabs who crossed the area then decided to stay and it became today a thriving City of Mecca.

    In that place then performed Hajj and Umrah by all Muslims around the world. And the Siti Hajar incident was then used as the basis for the Sa’i worship which is currently being carried out during the Umrah or Hajj pilgrimage.

    the meaning of  Sa’i

    Linguistically, Sa’i means struggling or trying. But later, the meaning of sa’i was developed into a life struggle carried out for the individual, family, and society. Sa’i is interpreted as a life struggle that never gives up and does not give up. That life must be lived with patience, piety, and trust in Allah SWT.

  • The Gig Economy Explained: Definition, Benefits, and Risks

    The Gig Economy Explained: Definition, Benefits, and Risks

    Gig Economy is a term that has recently been booming among the public. The gig economy was born from significant technological developments or we know it as 4.0 technology 

    The gig economy actually refers to a new way of working that is considered more effective and efficient than the previous way of working. In addition, the gig economy can also be a source of income today. 

    So what exactly is the gig economy? How does the gig economy phenomenon work and are there any impacts? 

    What is Gig Economy? 

    the term gig economy comes from the word gig which was previously often used in the entertainment and arts industries.

    Gig is used to name a project in progress and get paid based on the number of projects completed. Gig economy workers generally do not have a fixed income like workers in general. 

    The easiest illustration is about the recent news where there is a resident who accuses his neighbor of practicing pigs because it looks like he doesn’t work but has a lot of money. 

    The presence of the gig economy makes it easier for us to make money because we can work or complete projects from anywhere. Examples of the work in question are content creators, graphic designers, web hosting, and so on. 

    This new way of working is indeed a new thing for ordinary people or the boomers generation. For them, work is leaving the house and going to the office. The COVID-19 pandemic has made the gig economy easier to practice or what we know as Work From Home (WFH). 

    It should be underlined that not all jobs can use the gig economy style, but at least the presence of this gig economy can reduce inequality due to access or ease of making money. 

    Common Types of Jobs

    In the gig economy principle, a person is paid based on the project or work completed. Their monthly income is generally not as fixed as permanent workers in a company. Their income can be greater or less each month, depending on the projects completed. 

    To quote Glints, here are some jobs that are often found in the gig economy:

    • IT: network analyst, information security engineer
    • Penulisan: content writer, resume writer, copywriter, UX copywriter
    • Accounting: accountant,  accounting assistant
    • Administratif: virtual assistant, pharmacy technician, design administrative assistant
    • Education: teacher, lecturer, tutor
    • Software development: game engineer, UI/UX designer, DevOps engineer
    • Project management: project manager, office manager, epic management project manager

    The Impact of the Gig Economy

    The presence of the gig economy is like a double-edged sword where it has both positive and negative impacts. Below  describes the impacts of the gig economy.

    The positive impact of the gig economy is the ease with which a person can take on many projects at one time. You can customize how many projects fit the lifestyle you want to run.

    In addition, you will have many skills because you can determine which project suits your abilities. You can change career direction according to your personality or follow the market demand. Another advantage is that you can determine the rates for the projects you take. 

    Meanwhile, the negative impact of the gig economy is an unclear career path. Because you are a freelancer, it is difficult for you to get a career path.

    Another negative impact is that it is difficult to find a  work life balance . The gig economy offers flexibility where you can work anywhere and anytime. For those of you who are not able to manage time well, this can be a boomerang on physical and spiritual health.

    Lastly, the gig economy can have an impact on the possible exploitation of workers. Because of your non-permanent status, it is difficult for you to get the benefits offered by the company such as protection, holidays, benefits, and so on. 

    That’s information about the gig economy. 

  • Economic Goods: Definition, Types, and Examples

    Economic Goods: Definition, Types, and Examples

    In economics, there are three types of goods that humans can use to support their survival. The three types of goods are economic goods, illite goods, and free goods.

    All three have different meanings and characteristics. However, because there are goods that are limited. Maybe you will not be able to enjoy the item continuously.

    Perhaps from the three terms, you will hear about economic goods more often. For that, so that you also understand more, this article will explain about economic goods, starting from the definition, examples of economic goods, the difference between economic goods and free goods and several other things.

    For that for those of you who want to know more about economic goods, please read the reviews in this article.

    Definition of Economic Goods

    Before discussing examples of economic goods. It would be better if you also know what economic goods are. Economic goods are goods that can meet human needs but in limited quantities.

    The word limited refers to the amount of goods that are less than the amount needed by society. Due to the limited availability of these goods, humans will make sacrifices to be able to get these goods.

    The sacrifice that can be made to achieve economic benefits is an obligation to spend money, time or thought. The availability of these goods is obtained in two ways, namely produced by human labor or indeed goods provided by nature and can be used for free.

    You can get these items at the market, department stores or other types of retailers. Even so, business people want to strengthen their company’s position in field or market conditions. Most of these companies will use a  positioning strategy .

    This positioning strategy is a company’s effort to strengthen their image in order to get a special place in accordance with their target market.

    Microeconomics is a form of high level of mobility in the market

    Types of Economic Goods

    As explained earlier, economic goods are goods that have a lower price and supply compared to market demand. Economic goods also require scarce valuable resources that can provide alternative uses.

    An example is the limited availability of land capable of producing rice and sugar cane. If indeed a farmer wants to produce large products. So the farmer must sacrifice sugarcane production.

    So that it can also be called economic goods has a relationship with the problem of saving scarce resources in order to meet human needs or desires.

    In this explanation, it can be interpreted that all material goods are economic goods. Today there are several types of economic goods. If indeed you do not know the types of economic goods. Then the explanation below will more easily help you to know more about the types of economic goods.

    1. Consumer Goods

    Consumer goods are final goods that can directly satisfy the desires of consumers. These goods include bread, milk, clothing and also medicine.

    In addition, consumer goods are also divided into two groups. The two groups are disposable consumer goods and durable consumer goods.

    a. Disposable Consumer Goods

    Disposable consumer goods are goods that can be used up immediately in one act of consumption. For example, food, cigarettes, matches and fuel. These goods are also included in the category of direct consumption goods.

    This is because these goods are able to provide satisfaction for human desires. In addition, disposable consumer goods also apply to various types of services, such as doctors, lawyers, to waiters, which are also included in disposable goods.

    Disposable Consumer Goods

    b. Durable Consumer Goods

    Meanwhile, durable consumer goods are goods that can be used for a long period of time. The period of time used is not so important, whether it is a short period of time or a long period of time. For example, clothes, tv, pens and so on that have a long period of use.

    Durable Consumer Goods

    2. Capital Goods or Producers

    Next there are types of capital goods or producers. Capital goods are goods that can help in the production process of other goods. The goal remains the same, namely to satisfy consumer satisfaction directly or indirectly.

    Some examples of capital goods or producers are machinery, plants to agricultural and industrial raw materials and so on.

    Capital goods or producers are also still divided into two groups, namely disposable producer goods and manufactured goods that can be used for a long time.

    a. Disposable Manufacturer Items

    Disposable producer goods are goods that will be used up in one act of production. This means that when used once, the manufacturer’s goods will lose their original shape. For example, paper is used to print books and coal is used for factories.

    Disposable Manufacturer Items

    b. Durable Producer Goods

    Durable producer goods are goods that can be used repeatedly. When used for a long time over and over again, the item will not lose its usefulness immediately.

    For example, capital goods such as machinery, factories, tool factory buildings and so on.

    Some of the points explained above are examples of economic goods. The difference between consumer goods and capital goods is seen from their use. Some examples of goods such as electricity and coal are examples of goods that can be used as consumer goods as well as capital goods.

    Then the difference between disposable goods and durable goods also has an important meaning from an economic point of view. The demand for single-use items is considered to be more regular and stable as well as predictable in advance.

    Durable Producer Goods

    Examples of Economic Goods

    The next explanation is an example of economic goods. Currently, there are many examples of goods or services that are classified as economic goods. Even this economic item you may have found easily in the environment. Some examples of economic goods are as follows.

    1. Clothing

    The first example of economic goods is clothing. Clothing is one type of item that is really needed by humans. The number of these clothing products is usually limited.

    In addition, to be able to get this clothing product requires a sacrifice and also competition with others. Because of this, clothing products are classified as economic goods.

    Although in your mind there is a question why the clothes that still exist are included in the economic goods category. Back again as explained earlier if in economics, a lot and a little is something that is so relative.

    Clothing

    However, for clothing products that fall into the category of economic goods, the emphasis is on the method of production and the process of obtaining them. For the production of clothing requires limited materials.

    While someone who wants to get clothes also requires sacrifices such as materials, money, energy, time and even competition with other people who both want the clothing product. Therefore, clothing products are included in the category of economic goods.

    2. Food or Drink

    The next example is food and drink. Food and beverages are included in the category of economic goods because they are seen from the process of obtaining them. Humans need a certain effort to be able to get food and drink.

    Some of the sacrifices made by humans in getting food and drink are making the purchase process by spending money. Then humans also have to do the processing and also look for raw materials for these foods and beverages.

    Basic Needs or Physiology- eati
    Food is one of Basic Needs or Physiology example

    3. Residence

    The next example is a place to live. The limited number of livable housing makes it fall into the category of economic goods. In addition, the process of getting a place to live has also made it into the category of economic goods.

    The reason is that humans have to make certain efforts to be able to get a place to live, such as spending money. The residence referred to here can be a permanent residence owned by private property or a temporary residence such as a boarding house or a rented house.

    To be able to get a permanent residence that is privately owned, one must be able to spend a certain amount of money, building materials such as wood, cement, sand and others if one has to build it from scratch. Then for temporary houses such as boarding houses or rented houses also need money to be able to occupy them.

    Because using these costs makes the place of residence into the category of economic goods.

    Residence

    4. Health Services

    Previously, many examples of economic goods were explained in the form of goods or physical products. So the next example is in the form of services. For example, health services or doctor services.

    This can be seen from the very limited number of practicing doctors. So to use their services requires certain efforts such as queuing and also paying special fees.

    Then to become a doctor also requires a lot of effort and sacrifice such as the costs, time, thoughts to be able to get expertise and also a doctor’s degree.

    Until now, it is not only doctor’s services that are included in economic goods. However, many other services also fall into the category of economic goods.

    This is because when someone needs the help of a service. So they have to spend certain efforts or sacrifices such as spending money.

    Health Services

    Definition of Free Goods

    Not only economic goods, in economics there are also free goods which are also needed for the survival of human life. When viewed from the understanding, in general, economic goods are goods that can be obtained by humans without the need to use certain efforts or sacrifices.

    This is because free goods have an unlimited amount and have been provided by nature in greater quantities than the number of human needs.

    The simplest examples of free goods are air or oxygen. Humans need air or oxygen to survive. In the process of getting it, humans do not need to make certain efforts or sacrifices. However, it is possible that the category of free goods can bear status because it requires a special handling of these goods.

    For example, oxygen that can be used by humans freely without any effort can result in status for people who have health problems. Because those who have health problems in breathing may need special oxygen which must be treated in a certain way before use.

    Free Goods

    Difference between Economic Goods and Free Goods

    In economics, goods are divided into several types depending on the factors in them. Two of them are economic goods and free goods. Previously it has been explained related to what economic goods are.

    At this point, the difference between economic goods and free goods will also be explained. One of the differences between economic goods and free goods lies in the completeness of the commodity.

    Both free goods and economic goods, both are equally needed by humans to meet the needs in their lives. Actually, these two types of goods are not always in the form of commodities, but can also be in the form of services. For clarity, here are some differences between economic goods and free goods.

    1. Item Quantity

    The first difference between economic goods and free goods lies in the quantity of these goods. Economic goods have a very limited quantity. Meanwhile, free goods have an unlimited number.

    The limited number of goods can also be called the scarcity of goods. From this it can be concluded that economic goods have a slightly or more limited amount.

    However, for this small amount, it is still quite relative or requires a comparison. Comparison of the limitations of goods is from the number of human needs associated with these goods.

    You could say if human needs have a limited amount. Therefore, as long as the availability of goods is able to meet these unlimited human needs. It can be interpreted if the goods are free goods.

    And vice versa if an item cannot meet unlimited human needs. Then the goods are included in the category of economic goods.

    Difference between Economic Goods and Free Goods

    2. Production Process

    The second difference between economic goods and free goods lies in the production process. Economic goods require a certain effort for the process of getting it or the production process.

    The existence of a factor that requires effort in obtaining it makes economic goods not mass-produced in unlimited quantities. In the production process, economic goods have their own limitations so that these goods have a limited amount.

    As for free goods to be able to use it without the need to use economic resources. The simplest examples of free goods are the heat of the sun and air.

    It doesn’t just have an unlimited number. However, both sunlight and air can be used by humans without the need to carry out the production process first.

    Difference between Economic Goods and Free Goods

    3. How to Obtain

    The third difference between economic goods and free goods is seen from the way they are obtained. To be able to get free goods does not require a certain effort. Meanwhile, economic goods require sacrifice or competition to get them.

    Having an unlimited number is the factor that makes free goods require no special effort to be obtained. On the other hand, for economic goods that have a limited amount, they must require a sacrifice or competition in order to get them.

    From some of the explanations above, it can be seen how the differences between economic goods and free goods are. Although both are needed for human survival, both free goods and economic goods have differences as described above.

  • Data Collection Techniques in Research Design

    Data Collection Techniques in Research Design

    Data Collection Techniques in Research Design – Have you ever collected data by means of interviews? This activity is the most important activity in a research. When the plan has been carefully prepared but the data collection and analysis activities are not carried out properly, the objectives that have been set are not achieved properly.

    In other words, data collection and analysis activities are the implementation stage in the process of conducting research. The collection and analysis of research data is based on a method or procedure so that the desired data can be collected completely from the field. The following is an explanation of data collection techniques and research data processing. Check these out!

     

    Definition of Data Collection Techniques

    Data collection techniques are methods used to collect information or facts in the field

    Data collection was carried out to obtain the information needed in order to achieve the research objectives. Before conducting research, a researcher usually has a guess based on the theory he uses, this assumption is called a hypothesis. To prove the hypothesis empirically, a researcher needs to collect data to be investigated in more depth.

    The data collection process is determined by the variables in the hypothesis. Data collection is carried out on a predetermined sample. Data is something that has no meaning for the recipient and still requires processing.

    Data can have various forms, ranging from images, sounds, letters, numbers, language, symbols, and even circumstances that can assist research results later.

    All of these things can be called as data as long as we can use it as material to see the environment, object, event, or a concept. Data can be divided into several categories.

    Types of Data According to How to Obtain It

    The types of data can be categorized as follows according to how they are obtained, including:

    1. Primary data , namely data collected and processed by the researcher himself directly from the subject or object of research.
    2. Secondary data , namely data obtained not directly from the object or research subject.

     

    Types of Data by Source

    The types of data can also be categorized according to the way they are sourced, including:

    1. Internal data , namely data that describes the state or activities in an organization
    2. External data , namely data that describes a situation or activity outside an organization.

     

    Types of Data by Their Nature

    The types of data can also be categorized according to their nature, including:

    1. Quantitative data , namely data in the form of exact numbers, which can be measured ( measurable ) or can be calculated using numeric variables or numbers
    2. Qualitative data , namely data that is not in the form of numbers or data from verbal word explanations so that it cannot be analyzed in the form of numbers or numbers.

    Examples of quantitative data:

    • Data on the total number of students each year in a school
    • Data on the total sales of goods in a supermarket every day
    • Visitor data of a website
    • Tourist visit data for a province

    Examples of qualitative data:

    • Description of an area under study
    • Biographies of resource persons used as research references
    • The history of the establishment of a company under study

    Types of Data by Time of Collection

    The types of data can also be categorized according to the time of collection, including:

    1. Cross section / incidental , ie data collected only at a certain time
    2. Periodic data / time series , namely data collected from time to time to describe a development or trend of circumstances / events / activities.

     

    The Importance of Data Collection in Research Design

    Data collection is the recording of events or things or information as well as the characteristics of some or all elements of the population that will support and support research.

    Data is the plural form of datum. Data is information about something, it can be something that is known or in the form of an assumption. This data can also be in the form of facts depicted through numbers, symbols, and codes.

     

    List of Questions in the Data Collection Process

    The questionnaire is an important standard data collection tool in the form of a series of questions about a number of indicators from a number of variables that are ordered in such a way as to facilitate the interview. There are several things that must be considered before making a list of questions, namely as follows:

    • There is clarity of concepts and variables used
    • Standardization (each respondent will be asked the same question)
    • Objectivity (questions must be as neutral as possible)
    • Unit Relevance (there is accuracy in the selection of units or elements of data sources with research problems)

     

    Question Type

    Judging from the type of questions posed in the list of questions can be divided into several types of questions, namely:

    1. Questions about facts ( e.g. questions about Age, occupation, etc.)
    2. Questions about Opinion, for example, what is someone’s opinion about the existence of electricity entering the village?
    3. Questions about information or knowledge, for example, “Since when did electricity enter this village?”
    4. Questions about perception (this question is a question that seeks to measure how respondents judge something in relation to other things or other people).

     

    Data Based on the Source of Retrieval

    The list of questions cannot be separated from research, especially in the data collection process. Based on the source of data collection is divided into:

    1. Primary Data or

      data obtained or collected directly in the field by the person conducting the research or the person concerned who needs it.

      Primary data is also known as original data.

    2. Secondary Data i.e.

      data obtained or collected by people conducting research from existing sources.

      This data is usually obtained from the library or from previous research reports. This secondary data is also known as available data.

     

    Question Forms

    While seen from the form, the questions can be divided into three forms, namely:

    1. Closed questions are questions that are equipped with a number of alternative answers. Respondents just choose one of the alternative answers. Respondents just have to choose one of the alternatives that have been provided according to their choice.
    2. Open-ended questions are types of questions that are not accompanied by alternative answers. So the respondent is free to express the answer according to the will of the respondent.
    3. A half-open question , which is a question in which a number of alternative answers are available, it is also possible for the respondent to present an answer according to his will.

    Based on its nature, data can also be divided into two, namely qualitative data and quantitative data. Qualitative data is data that is not in the form of numbers, while quantitative data is data in the form of numbers.

    Data Based on Level of Measurement

    Based on the level of measurement, the data is divided into four, namely:

    • Nominal Data is Data that comes from grouping events based on certain categories, the difference only showing qualitative differences
    • Interval data is data that comes from objects or categories that are sorted by a certain effect, where the distance between each object is the same. In this data, not against absolute zero
    • Ordinal data is data that comes from objects or categories arranged according to size, from the lowest level to the highest level or vice versa with distances that do not have to be the same.
    • Ratio data is data that collects all the characteristics of nominal data, ordinal data, and interval data. Figures in this data, indicate the actual size of the object being measured.

     

    Data Collection Techniques in Social Research

    Social research is conducted to solve problems using the theory and knowledge that has been learned. Research is also a requirement for students before completing their studies.

    Through social research, we are required to apply the material we have learned to the real world and recognize the patterns that occur in society.

    When conducting research, we also need to identify the data collection techniques that need to be carried out. Data collection techniques are the methods used by researchers in obtaining data in the field. In social research, there are several techniques that are commonly used, namely:

    1. questionnaire,
    2. literature review,
    3. interview, and
    4. observation.

    Questionnaire

    Questionnaires or questionnaires are data collection techniques by asking questions to be answered by respondents, usually in writing.

    Questionnaires are used when researchers want to know the perceptions or habits of a population based on respondents. Questionnaires that are distributed must be tested beforehand to find out if the questions entered can be used as a valid and reliable measuring tool.

    In general, questionnaires are used in quantitative research analysis using SPSS or the Statistical Package for the Social Sciences which is quite complicated.

    Questionnaires can be in the form of printed or online questionnaires. Literature Study The most commonly used data collection technique is literature study. Literature study collects relevant data from books, scientific articles, news, and other credible sources related to the research topic.

    Advantages of the Questionnaire method

    • In this technique the respondent fills in by themselves so that no interview is needed.
    • In terms of cost, this technique requires a relatively low cost.
    • In terms of time, this technique saves time, meaning that it can be sent to various different places at the same time, so that the return can be received in a not too long time.
    • With this technique, respondents can more freely fill out the questionnaire, without feeling embarrassed because no one is interviewing.
    • There was no influence from the interviewer who gave the questionnaire or questionnaire.

    Weaknesses of the Questionnaire include:

    • Less flexible
    • Low rate of return of the questionnaire
    • Unable to observe the respondent’s reaction when answering the question
    • The atmosphere of the environment when the respondent filled out the questionnaire was not controllable. It is possible that the questionnaire was filled out by someone else not the respondent
    • It is difficult to control respondents to answer in accordance with the order of questions in the questionnaire
    • Unable to use complex questionnaire formats.

    Literature review

    Literature studies can strengthen the background for doing research and allow us to study previous research, so that we can produce newer research. Interviews Interviews were conducted by means of question and answer with respondents or informants to obtain information needed for research. Literature Studies can be done through:

    • Editing – Editing is the process of re-examining the data that has been collected to find out whether the data is good enough and can be immediately prepared for the next process. The purpose of editing, basically, is to eliminate errors contained in the recording in the field and is to correct it. Things that need to be edited on the incoming data include whether or not the incoming data can be read, the completeness of the filling and whether or not the sampling instructions are fulfilled as well as compatibility, whether the contents of the answers can be understood.
    • Coding – is the provision of codes for each data that belongs to the same category. Code is a signal made in the form of numbers or letters that provide clues or identity on an information or data to be analyzed. Why do we use code? the answer is to simplify the research data. For example, with a number symbol, it is possible for researchers to make comparisons between respondents’ answers easily.
    • Processing data using simple statistics – usually using several techniques such as frequency distribution (frequency distribution), central tendency, and dispersion measures such as standard deviation and variance

    Interview

    Interviews are used to explore information or subjective perceptions of informants related to the topic to be studied. Previous researchers must prepare interview questions in advance. Similar to questionnaires, interview questions need to be tested for their abilities so that researchers can obtain the data needed. The advantages of interview techniques include that they can be used on respondents who cannot read and write.

    If there is a question that is not understood, the interviewer can immediately explain. The interviewer can immediately check the correctness of the respondent’s answer by asking comparison questions or by looking at the respondent’s face or movements. Disadvantages of interview techniques are interviews require a very large cost in terms of travel and daily money for data collectors, interviews can only reach a small number of respondents, the presence of the interviewer may annoy the respondents. Types of interviews can be divided into:

    Structured interview

    The structured interview technique is an interview conducted based on a questionnaire. The questionnaire is used by the interviewer and communicates the questions as stated in the questionnaire, so that the respondent understands the intent of the question asked by the interviewer and can answer it well.

    Unstructured interview

    The unstructured interview technique is an interview conducted based on a guideline or note that only contains points or points of thought about the things that will be asked during the interview. These guidelines are called interview guidelines. In this technique, the interviewer has the freedom to formulate and ask questions or points listed in the interview guide to the respondent.

    Type of unstructured interview

    This type of unstructured interview is divided into three, namely:

    1. Interviews focus is interview is meant to clarify an issue with the research hypotheses were formulated in advance
    2. A clinical interview is an interview that is basically the same as a focused interview in terms of its implementation. The difference only lies in the theme or topic. This interview is used to obtain information about the biographies of the people who are the unit of analysis of the research problem in question. This interview is usually used in the medical field.
    3. Free interviews are interviews that have absolutely no structure. Most depend on the development of Q&A between the interviewer and the respondent during the interview

    Observation

    Observation is a data collection technique that is carried out through direct observation.

    Researchers make observations on the spot on the object of research to be observed using the five senses. Researchers are positioned as observers or outsiders. In collecting data using observation, researchers can use notes or recordings.

    Observation can be participatory

    participatory, namely when the researcher joins in and carries out activities with the object of his observation.

    Advantages of the observation technique

    The advantages of observational techniques include:

    1. The data obtained is more actual in the sense that the data is obtained from the respondent at the time it occurs,
    2. The validity of the measuring instrument can be known directly.

    Weaknesses of observation technique

    The disadvantages of this technique are:

    1. In obtaining the expected data, the observer must wait and observe until the expected behavior appears.
    2. Some behaviors, such as criminal or personal behavior, are difficult or impossible, and may even be harmful to the observer.

    Types of Observation Techniques Based on Observer Involvement

    In addition to being structured or unstructured, observation or observation techniques are also distinguished based on the involvement of observers in the target environment of observation, including:

    • Engaged Observation – In this observation the observer takes on the role of a member of the target community.
    • Observation is not involved – In this observation, the interaction between the observer and the respondent as the object of observation does not occur at all. The observer only plays a role in observing the target of his observation, from outside the environment he is observing.

    The difference between the two itself lies in the observation involved is aimed at special interests or human values ​​and interactions between humans such as the view from the perspective of the people who are in or part of the situation and special setting, besides the location or place here and now from the setting and situation. daily life as the basis for research and methods.

    A form of theory and theory formulation that emphasizes the interpretation and understanding of human existence, A logical research process that is open-closed, flexible, provides opportunities and requires constant redefinition of what is the problem, based on facts collected in a different setting. concrete aspects of human existence.

     

  • Types of Social Control (Preventive, Repressive, Coercive)

    Types of Social Control (Preventive, Repressive, Coercive)

    In living side by side with other people in the community environment where the importance and the need for social control of the community in it. If there is no social control, various things can happen such as robbery, brawl, or even murder that can harm the environment and the people in it.

    However, what is the true meaning of social control itself? Check out the following information regarding social control which is one of the efforts to prevent social deviations, both individually and collectively.

     

    Definition of Social Control

    The definition of social control based on the website of the Ministry of Education and Culture or the Ministry of Education and Culture is a mechanism used to direct community members in an environment to implement social values ​​and norms that apply in it.

    According to the sociologist Peter L. Berger, the definition of social control is all the ways in which the community tries to discipline or regulate members within the community when they disobey. In addition, Joseph S. Roucek also defines social control as a collective term that has a reference to a planned process.

    Where each individual is persuaded, encouraged or even forced to adapt to the habits and values ​​of life that exist in a community group. Bruce J. Cohen who is a sociologist in his understanding of social control as various ways used to encourage every individual in a society to have behavior in accordance with the will of the community group.

    Robert MZ Lawang defines social control as all means used by a community environment to return or help perpetrators of social deviations to return to a good path.

    Social control according to Karel J. Veeger is a continuation of a socialization process that is carried out and has a relationship with various ways and methods used to encourage each individual to have thoughts and behaviors that are in harmony with the community group and the community environment in which they are located.

    Based on the various definitions expressed by these experts, it can be concluded that social control is a process that is owned or used by a person or group with the aim of influencing, inviting, or even forcing other existing members to instill in themselves the values ​​and norms that apply in the community. that’s where they are.

     

    The Purpose of Social Control

    After understanding what social control is, there are several reasons why it exists in a society.

    • Reducing social deviant behavior that may be carried out by someone, with the instillation of values ​​and norms, a person will understand not to do things that can harm himself and others.
    • Creating peace and harmony in coexistence in the community, with awareness in every individual in society, the risks of social deviation will be minimized so that it will create peace in an environment.
    • Making the perpetrator aware of the mistakes he made and willing to improve himself and his behavior towards others.
    • Make the perpetrators of social deviation have the awareness to comply with the values ​​and norms that exist and apply in the community.
    • Making people understand and instill in themselves the values ​​and norms that exist both self-awareness and coercion or encouragement from various factors.

     

    Characteristics of Social Control

    Social control that exists in a community environment itself has various characteristics that we can find, as follows.

    • The first characteristic of social control is to have a method or technique used to control the people in the environment.
    • The second characteristic of social control is that it aims to achieve a balance between stability and changes that are taking place in the community.
    • The third characteristic of social control is that it is usually carried out by a group of people against the individual concerned or other groups in a society.
    • The fourth characteristic of social control is that it has a two-way system that is often not realized by the parties concerned.

     

    Types of Social Control

    Based on the implementation time, the types of social control can be divided into two, namely, preventive social control and representative social control which are explained as follows.

    1. Preventive social control

    The first type of social control based on the time of its implementation is preventive social control which is a control that occurs in the community before the existence or occurrence of a deviant behavior.

    This preventive social control is usually carried out by someone through socialization of existing norms, education of the surrounding community, community education, and providing advice and consequences so that social deviations do not occur.

    2. Repressive social control

    The second type of social control based on the time of its implementation is repressive social control which is a control that occurs in a community environment after deviant behavior occurs in the community.

    Repressive social control
    Repressive social control

    This repressive social control itself is usually in the form of an effort made through giving consequences for those who violate, commensurate punishments, advice and counseling so as not to repeat it again and realize that it is a mistake. Based on the implementing officers, the types of social control can also be divided into two, namely, formal control and informal control.

    3. Formal controls

    The first type of social control based on its implementing officers is formal control which is usually carried out by various official institutions that officially declare regulations and values ​​and norms in an existing environment.

    In general, the rules as well as values ​​and norms that exist in the formal control environment are made in writing and there are already standards that apply in it. Formal control itself can be seen in several environments such as in the company environment, trade union associations, and existing judicial institutions.

    4. Informal controls

    The second type of social control based on its implementing officers is informal control which is usually made in a community group that has an unofficial nature and the existing rules or values ​​and norms are not written.

    Informal control can generally be seen in everyday life, such as when we gather with family or friends. These informal controls are also generally unplanned and occur spontaneously. For example, when we gather with friends and play a game.

    When someone cheats, that person will be ridiculed. This is a form of informal control. Based on its nature, the types of social control can also be divided into two, namely, curative social control and participatory social control.

    5. Curative social control

    The first type of social control based on its nature is curative social control which is a form of social control that is carried out through various coaching and healing to perpetrators of social deviations to change the values ​​and norms that exist in themselves. We can see curative social control through the rehabilitation provided to users of illegal drugs or drugs and alcoholic beverages.

    6. Participatory social control

    The second type of social control based on its nature is participatory social control which is a form of social control carried out by inviting or involving social deviants who have changed themselves to help improve the values ​​and norms of other social deviants.

    We can see participatory social control through how a former drug user or drug user is used as an anti-drug ambassador to invite other people who are still doing this to have a desire to change and become better.

     

    Social Control Function

    The following are some of the functions of social control in the community. Check out the following information.

    The first function of social control is to strengthen existing societal beliefs about social values ​​and norms. With the planting and strengthening of this belief, it can directly affect the sustainability of the existing community order. Ways that can be done to strengthen this belief are through various institutions such as schools, families, or through suggestions from the social environment.

    The second function of social control is to provide rewards to each party who is able to comply with social values ​​and norms that apply to the community. What is meant by reward here is to give praise, respect, and give gifts to members of the community. The purpose of giving these rewards is so that everyone continues to carry out existing values ​​and norms and provides an example for other members to become even better.

    The third function of social control is to develop inner shame. What is meant is that when a person who is a social deviant realizes his mistake, he will be ashamed to admit his mistake and his self-esteem will decrease. In addition, the consequences for the perpetrators of social deviance such as criticism or negative comments that come from the community will make him feel ashamed and deterred. That way, the person will have a sense of shame so that in the future they will not commit social deviations again.

    Social Control Function

    The fourth function of social control is to develop inner fear. When a person has a fear of doing an act or thing that can pose a risk of getting consequences, it will indirectly make him aware to avoid these things. With that fear, he will try to do good things and avoid things that are risky to harm himself and others.

    The fifth function of social control is to create a legal system in a society. In order for a common goal or agreement to be achieved in an environment, it is necessary to apply values ​​and norms to regulate every member of the community in it. With this legal system, which contains rules and consequences that can be accepted by any social deviant behavior, people will be aware not to do this if they do not want to get a reward for their actions.

     

    Forms of Social Control

    In people’s lives, there are various forms of social control that can be done or seen. Here are some forms of social control.

    1. Gossip

    The first form of social control is gossip or what is often referred to as hearsay, which is a behavior of exchanging information carried out by someone without clear concrete evidence of an event or negative behavior.

    2. Reprimand

    The second form of social control is a reprimand which is generally carried out by a person or a group against perpetrators of social deviance that can disrupt the harmony of the community environment. By doing this, someone gives direct and open criticism so that the perpetrator of the social deviation can immediately realize the mistake he has made.

    3. Sanctions

    The third form of social control is sanctions or punishments given to people who commit social deviant behavior. For example, in everyday life, when we go to school and someone is reprimanded for cheating on an exam, the score given is zero. That way he became aware of being afraid and not doing it again. This form of sanction itself also has two benefits, namely, helping someone to be aware of the social deviant behavior that he has committed, and being a warning or reminder for other community members not to make the same mistake.

    4. Education

    The fourth form of social control is education, where the higher the education a person has, the better understanding of existing values ​​and norms, and can practice them in real situations and help bring about change in the community environment.

    5. Religion

    The fifth form of social control is religion, where in religion it is taught for everyone to maintain good relations between each other, relations with other creatures, and also their relationship with those in power. In religious teachings, there are also various prohibitions and orders to stay away from negative things that can become social deviations, because later they will get sanctions.

     

    Ways of Social Control

    Here are some ways that can be done to carry out social control in a community environment.

    1. Persuasive Social Control

    The first method used to exercise social control is to use persuasive methods. Where by using this method, there is no violence against perpetrators of social deviance, but the method used is to advise, provide advice and guidance so as not to commit deviant behavior in the future. Persuasive methods are usually carried out within the community through verbal or symbolic forms in the form of banners, posters, or public service advertisements that are distributed to community members.

    2. Coercive Social Control

    The second method used to exercise social control is to use coercive methods. Where by using this method, the occurrence of coercion or violence against perpetrators of social deviance both in physical and psychological forms. This is often done by the authorities when there is no other way to make the perpetrator aware.

    However, using this method often leads to consequences such as negative reactions from the other party. One example that we can see is the expulsion and control of street vendors or street vendors who sell on the highway which often makes the roads narrow and causes congestion. Therefore, often the patrolling police warn them to move, but are still ignored until they use this coercive method.

    3. Socialization

    The third method used to carry out social control is to use socialization methods. Where by using this method, community members are taught to create a habit and instill in themselves the values ​​and norms that apply to a community environment. This method is carried out through socialization to the surrounding community, by introducing existing norms and values ​​and their application to attitudes and behavior in everyday life in the community.

    4. Social Emphasis

    The fourth method used to exercise social control is through social suppression. Where by using this method, it is expected to be able to control the behavior of each member of the environment in it. By doing this, it is hoped that a community environment can instill in itself the values ​​and norms that exist in each individual so that they can live side by side properly.

    5. Preventive social control

    namely prevention before deviations from the norms and values ​​of society occur. For example, parents who forbid their children to hang out with friends who like to gamble. This is so that his son does not become a gambler later.

    6. Repressive social control

    namely an effort to restore the situation after the deviation of the values ​​and norms of society. For example, someone who breaks a promise is reported to the court, so the judge imposes a sentence by paying a debt and a fine.

  • The History of Borobudur Temple and Its Origin Story

    The History of Borobudur Temple and Its Origin Story

    Borobudur Temple is a Buddhist temple located in the city of Magelang, Central Java province. Borobudur Temple is the largest Buddhist temple or temple in the world, as well as one of the largest Buddhist monuments in the world. Because of its splendor and majesty, the temple which was built in the 8th century has been designated by UNESCO as one of the world’s cultural heritages (world heritage).

    Borobudur temple was built during the reign of the Syailendra dynasty. This stupa -shaped was erected by Mahayana Buddhists during the reign of the Syailendra dynasty. History of the establishment of Borobudur Temple was built in the 8th century.

    The origin of the Borobudur temple is still shrouded in mystery, regarding who the founder of the Borobudur temple was and what was the initial purpose of building this temple. Many stories and stories of the Borobudur temple are circulating which are now known as local folk tales.

    The temple building was built in the 8th century AD. This temple was inaugurated as a tourist spot on July 15, 1980. Then, Borobudur temple was designated as a World Cultural Heritage by UNESCO in 1991.

    History of Borobudur Temple

    There is a long history in the founding of the Borobudur temple. Until now, no written evidence has been found that explains who built Borobudur and what was the purpose of building this temple. It is estimated that Borobudur temple was built in 800 AD.

    The estimated time for the construction of the temple is based on a comparison between the type of script written on the closed foot of Karmawibhangga with the type of script commonly used in 8th and 9th century royal inscriptions. Borobudur temple was built during the kingdom of the Syailendra dynasty in Central Java which coincided between the period 760 to 830 AD.

    The process of building the Borobudur temple is estimated to take more than 75 to 100 years. The new Borobudur Temple was completely completed 100% during the reign of King Samaratungga in 825 AD. Also read : The History of Prambanan Temple.

    Borobudur Temple Construction Process

    From the thesis entitled The Relation of the Meaning of Borobudur Temple Symbols with Buddhist Teachings, the builder of the Borobudur temple named Gunadarma. This temple was built in 5 stages:

    1. The first stage (780 AD)

    Initial construction was carried out on a hill. The hillside was leveled and the courtyard expanded. Not all materials for the temple are made of andesite. The process of building a hill uses compacted soil and covered with stone structures.

    This rock structure resembles a shell and encloses a hill of earth. Meanwhile, the rest of the hill is covered with stone structures layer by layer. The beginning of the construction of the temple was arranged in stages like a stepped pyramid.

    2. Second and third stages (792 AD)

    The second level, there is the addition of two square -shaped steps. Part of the ledge fence and a circular step on it. The stair section has a large single stupa.

    stupa
    stupa

    The third part is a change in the design of the building. The top of the circle with a single main stupa was dismantled. The stupa was replaced by three circular steps, while small stupas were built in a circle on the courtyard of the steps. The large stupa is in the middle.

    Archaeologists suspect, originally Borobudur was designed in the form of a single, very large stupa. So that the stupa is like a crown in the middle. But the large stupa was too heavy, pushing the structure of the building.

    Stupa that is too large can shift the building. The core of Borobudur is just a hill of earth, so that the pressure on the top can spread downwards so that Borobudur is threatened with landslides and collapses.

    Finally, the main stupa was replaced with circular terraces decorated with small stupas. The main stupa is only one which functions to support the temple walls and prevent shifting.

    3. The Fourth Stage (824 AD) and the fifth 833 AD

    The temple building underwent minor changes, such as the addition of the outermost balustrade, improvement of the reliefs, changes to the stairs, widening of the toe, and the arch of the gate.

    Philosophy of Borobudur Temple

    Borobudur Temple symbolizes the universe. The structure of the building consists of 10 levels in the form of terraces which are divided into three levels. Each level contains a philosophical meaning in Buddhism, namely:

    • Kamadhatu , the bottom part which symbolizes the underworld or human behavior bound by worldly desires
    • Rupadhatu , the middle part which symbolizes the intermediate nature or human behavior that begins to leave worldly desires
    • Arupadharu , the top part which symbolizes the upper nature or human behavior that has been completely free from worldly desires

    These three levels are distinguished based on the reliefs of the temple. This relief is stretched for 3 meters. There are 1,460 frames interspersed with dividing fields totaling about 1,212 pieces.

    Borobudur Temple Construction Process

    Above the row of frames there is a kind of longitudinal fold, extending as far as one and a half kilometers. These folds are decorated and form a series of lotus flowers. In the bag there is a triangular simbar decoration amounting to 1,476 pieces.

    Level Kamadhatu and rupadhatu contained 1,472 432 stupas and Buddha statues that surround the entire winds. At the last level, there are 72 stupas that surround the main stupa at the top. It took about two million pieces of stone to build this monument.

    Borobudur Temple as a whole consists of a stupa. The stupa is one of the Buddhist memorial buildings. In Sanskrit, stupa means mound or heap of earth.

    This temple is located in Borobudur in the Kedu plain area which is surrounded by Mount Merapi and Merbabu in the east, Mount Sindoro and Sumbing in the north, and the Menoreh mountains in the south.

    Borobudur Temple Abandoned

    Borobudur Temple was abandoned around 928 and 1006. At that time, King Mpu Sindok moved the royal capital of Medang to East Java. The move of the capital city was due to a volcanic eruption and the Borobudur temple was finally abandoned.

    Around the year 1,365, Mpu Prapanca in the Nagarakretagama manuscript was written during the Majapahit kingdom. In the manuscript he mentions “Wihara di Budur”

    The History of the Rediscovery of the Borobudur Temple

    The history of the next Borobudur temple enters the stage of rediscovery. Please note that the Borobudur temple was hidden and neglected for centuries. Borobudur was buried under a layer of soil and volcanic ash which was then overgrown with trees and shrubs so that Borobudur at that time really resembled a hill.

    It is not known why Borobudur was abandoned and left unkempt. It is estimated that between 928 and 1006 AD when King Mpu Sindok moved the royal capital of Medang to East Java because a volcanic eruption was a factor why Borobudur was abandoned, although this is also uncertain.

    The scattered parts of Borobudur Temple at Karmawibhangga Museum
    The scattered parts of Borobudur Temple at Karmawibhangga Museum

    The entry of the Islamic kingdom in the 15th century also made Borobudur increasingly forgotten. Although there are stories and legends of Borobudur temple circulating about the success of this temple in the past.

    Only in 1814 AD, Borobudur temple was rediscovered again. At that time the island of Java was under British rule, led by Thomas Stamford Raffles as governor general. Raffles has an interest in Javanese history and culture.

    While inspecting Semarang, Raffles heard the news of a large monument hidden in the forest near the village of Bumisegoro. He then sent HC Cornelius, a Dutch engineer, to investigate the existence of this large building.

    Within 2 months, Cornelius and 200 of his subordinates cut down the trees and shrubs that grew on the Borobudur hill and cleaned the layer of soil that buried this temple. He reported this finding and gave Raffles a sketch of the Borobudur temple. Raffles is also credited with rediscovering the Borobudur Temple and starting to attract world attention for the existence of this once lost monument.

    Hartmann, a Dutch East Indies government official at the Kedu Residency, continued Cornelius’ work. In 1835 AD, finally all parts of the temple building have been excavated and can be seen. The Dutch East Indies government commissioned FC Wilsen, a Dutch technical engineer to study this monument.

    After that, the Dutch East Indies government continued to conduct research related to Borobudur temple. Borobudur is also increasingly famous to invite temple collectors to visit. Borobudur was also a target for temple artifact thieves to be then sold at high prices.

    In 1882, the chief inspector of cultural artifacts suggested that Borobudur be completely dismantled and its reliefs moved to a museum due to unstable conditions, uncertainty and rampant theft at the monument. However, a government-appointed archaeologist named Groenveldt conducted a thorough investigation of the site and then suggested that the building be left intact and not dismantled for removal.

    Borobudur Temple Restoration

    The history of the founding of Borobudur Temple continues with the restoration process. In 1900 AD, the Dutch East Indies government took steps to preserve this monument.

    A commission consisting of three officials was formed to examine this monument consisting of an art historian named Brandes, a Dutch engineer and soldier named Theodoor van Erp and a building construction expert engineer of the Department of Public Works named Van de Kamer.

    The restoration of the temple was carried out by paying attention to many things. Among other things, improvements were made to the drainage system, setting the corners of the building, removing dangerous stones, strengthening the first balustrade and restoring several niches, gates, stupas and main stupas.

    Another thing that must be added is the making of the temple yard fence and the cleaning of the area. The process of restoring the Borobudur temple was carried out in the period 1907 to 1911 AD. After Indonesia’s independence, the government also carried out several restorations, although on a small scale.

    In the late 1960s, the Indonesian government had submitted a request to the international community for a major restoration to protect this monument. The Indonesian government in collaboration with UNESCO took steps for the overall repair of the temple in a major project that started from 1975 to 1982.

    After the renovation, in 1991 to be exact, UNESCO then included Borobudur Temple in the list of World Heritage Sites and included in the Cultural criteria.

    So that’s an explanation of the brief history of the Borobudur temple and the origin of the complete Borobudur temple. Currently, Borobudur temple tourism is one of the most visited tourist attractions in Indonesia. Borobudur Temple is able to attract local and foreign tourists as one of the world’s famous cultural heritages.

  • Karl Marx and the Birth of Marxism: An Overview of His Life and Theories

    Karl Marx and the Birth of Marxism: An Overview of His Life and Theories

    Karl Marx (5 May 1818 – 14 March 1883), a Prussian political economist, journalist, and activist, and author of the important works, “The Communist Manifesto” and “Das Kapital,” influenced generations of political leaders and socioeconomic thinkers. Also known as the Father of Communism, Marx’s ideas spawned violent bloody revolutions, ushered in the overthrow of centuries-old governments, and served as the basis of the political system that still controls more than  20 percent of the world’s population — or one in five people on the planet. “The Columbia History of the World” calls Marx’s writings “one of the most extraordinary and original syntheses in the history of the human intellect.”

     

    The Childhood of a Karl Marx

    Marx was born on May 5, 1818 in the city of Trier, southeastern Germany, which was then still part of the Lower Rhine Province, Kingdom of Prussia. He was born into a middle-class family. Marx was the third of nine children. Although he came from a family of Jewish descent, in 1816 his father, Heinrich Marx, decided to be baptized into a Christian at the age of 36. His mother, Heinrietta Marx, was also baptized after his father’s death.

    His father Heinrich was a fairly successful lawyer in Prussia. He was also a reform activist in his time. Heinrich’s decision to convert to Christianity was also inseparable from the 1815 regulation that prohibited Jews from occupying crucial positions in society.

    Karl Marx himself was baptized at the age of six, along with his brothers. Although Trier is a Catholic city, the influence of liberal ideas is easier to enter because of its location on the border with France. Until the age of 12 years, Marx studied at home alias home school . Then he continued for another 5 years at the Jesuit school, Firdrich-Wilhelm Gymnasuium, Trier. The principal is a friend of his father’s who is also liberal.

     

    Marx’s Youth

    Marx was educated at home by his father until high school, and in 1835 at the age of 17, he enrolled at the University of Bonn in Germany, where he studied law at his father’s request. Marx, however, was much more interested in philosophy and literature.

    After his first year at the university, Marx became engaged to Jenny von Westphalen, an educated female baron. They married in 1843. In 1836, Marx enrolled at the University of Berlin, where he immediately felt at home when he joined a circle of brilliant and extreme thinkers who challenged existing institutions and ideas, including religion, philosophy, ethics. , and politics. Marx graduated with a doctorate in 1841.

    Since entering campus, Marx began to show his rebellious attitude . October 1835, Marx started his schooling at the University of Bonn, Germany. He is active in academic life at his campus and is also known as a rebel. During his two semesters in Bonn, Marx spent his days making trouble, getting drunk, and fighting. In the end, his father forced Marx to enroll in another, more serious school, namely the University of Berlin, majoring in philosophy and law.

    This is where Marx was introduced to philosophy from GWF Hegel, a professor in Berlin. Although initially not so enamored with Hegel’s theory, Marx was heavily involved with Hegelian youth groups which were a collection of radical students. They usually criticize the political and religious establishment at that time.

    In 1836, Marx became increasingly involved in political science. He was even secretly engaged to Jenny von Westphalen, the daughter of an upper-class family in Trier. Because of his increasingly radical attitude, his father became worried. Heinrich even wrote to his son and even asked Marx to stop his marriage to Jenny.

    But in 1843, Marx married Jenny. They had six children, but due to extreme poverty, only three children who were girls survived to adulthood. Even as adults, their children are actively involved in political activities, you know .

     

    Career and Exile

    After school, Marx turned to writing and journalism to support himself. In 1842 he became editor of the liberal Cologne newspaper “Rheinische Zeitung”, but the Berlin government banned its publication the following year. Marx left Germany — never to return — and spent two years in Paris, where he first met his collaborator, Friedrich Engels.

    However, expelled from France by those in power who opposed his ideas, Marx moved to Brussels, in 1845, where he founded the German Workers’ Party and was active in the Communist League. There, Marx networked with other leftist intellectuals and activists and—along with Engels—wrote his most famous work, ” The Communist Manifesto .” Published in 1848, it contained the famous line: “The workers of the world unite. You have nothing to lose but your chains.” After being exiled from Belgium, Marx finally settled in London where he lived as a stateless exile for the rest of his life.

    Marx worked in journalism and wrote for German and English language publications. From 1852 to 1862, he was a correspondent for the “New York Daily Tribune,” writing a total of 355 articles. He also continued to write and formulate his theories about the nature of society and how he believed that society could be improved, and actively campaigned for socialism.

    He spent the rest of his life working on a three-volume tome, “Das Kapital,” which saw its first volume published in 1867. In this work, Marx aimed to explain the economic impact of capitalist society, in which a small group, which he called the bourgeoisie, owned the the means of production and use their power to exploit the proletariat, the working class which actually produces the goods that enrich the capitalist tsar. Engels edited and published the second and third volumes of “Das Kapital” shortly after Marx’s death.

     

    The works of Karl Marx during his Life

    after marrying Jenny, they moved to Paris. In that city, Marx met Friederich Engels, a writer who later became his colleague and friend. Both of them issued a lot of work together, you know . Their first work was the book The Holy Family in 1845.

    Not only this one book, Marx and Engels also have many other works. According to the marxist.org website , there are also other important works such as:

    • Thesis on Feuerbach (Marx, 1845)
    • The Poverty of Philosophy (Marx, 1847)
    • Wages and Capital (Marx, 1847)
    • Principles of Communism (Engels, 1847)
    • Communist Party Manifesto (Marx and Engels, 1848)
    • Wages Price and Profit (Marx, 1865)
    • Housing Problems (Engels, 1872)
    • Capital I, Capital II, Capital III (Marx, 1867 – 1894)

     

    Marx and the Idea of ​​the Factory School

    Do you know at that time Marx was also very active in forming a better curriculum for the children of workers, you know ? Yup, in the old days, young children from 9-12 years old were required to work in factories.

    For this reason, in his book entitled Kapital, Marx put his ideas into creating a part-time system for the children of workers. Marx hoped that the children would be able to work but still be able to continue their studies. But unfortunately, the capitalists and the government at that time did not pay much attention to this part-time idea of ​​​​Marx. They say it costs more to hire 2 shifts of child labourers. As a result, many children of workers are fired if they work while attending school.

    The curriculum proposed by Marx at that time was not much different from conventional schools. Starting with mental education, then physical education (a combination of gymnastics and military training), then there is also a polytechnic education which will teach the general principles of all production processes.

    In essence, Marx wants to emphasize the education of children and young workers so that they can develop into individuals who can make social changes around them. Marx was more in favor of a combination of education and work rather than an education system that required children to study all day long.

    According to him, with this part-time work and school system, children and young workers can practice directly and know what is the cause of their mistakes in the production system, and can become individuals who want to make changes for the sake of their people.

     

    Death and Inheritance

    While Marx remained a relatively unknown figure in his lifetime, the ideas and ideology of Marxism began to exert a profound influence on the socialist movement shortly after his death. He died of cancer on March 14, 1883, and was buried in Highgate Cemetery in London.

    Marx’s theory of society, economy, and politics, collectively known as Marxism, holds that all societies develop through the dialectic of class struggle. He was critical of the current socio-economic form of society, capitalism, which he called the dictatorship of the bourgeoisie, believed it was run by the rich middle and upper classes purely for their own gain, and predicted that it would inevitably result internally. tension that would lead to its self-destruction and its replacement by a new system, socialism.

    Under socialism, he argued that society would be governed by the working class in what he called the “dictatorship of the proletariat.” He believed that socialism would eventually be replaced by a stateless and classless society called  communism .

     

    Continuous Influence

    Whether Marx intended for the proletariat to rise up and foment revolution or whether he felt that the ideals of communism, ruled by an egalitarian proletariat, would simply outlast capitalism, is debated to this day. But, several successful revolutions did occur, propelled by groups that adopted communism—including those in Russia, 1917-1919, and China, 1945-1948. Flags and banners depicting Vladimir Lenin, the leader of the Russian Revolution, together with Marx, were long displayed in the Soviet Union. The same was true in China, where similar flags showing the leader of that country’s revolution, Mao Zedong, together with Marx were also prominently displayed.

    Marx has been described as one of the most influential figures in human history, and in a 1999 BBC poll was voted “the thinker of the millennium” by people from all over the world. The memorial at his grave is always covered with thanks from his fans. His tombstone is inscribed with words that echo the words of the “Communist Manifesto”, which seems to foretell Marx’s influence on world politics and the economy: “Workers from all lands unite”.

     

  • There’s Engels Behind Marx: The Biography of Friedrich Engels

    There’s Engels Behind Marx: The Biography of Friedrich Engels

    So far, when we talk about Friedrich Engels, what immediately comes to mind is that he is a friend of Marx. A loyal friend of mine, whose friendship is not only amazing but also thrilling and changing the world. But who really Engels is, and what his role is in the international socialism movement, the Indonesian public doesn’t know much about.

    In my research, dozens of biographies have been published since Engels’ death on August 5, 1895. Karl Kautsky wrote a brief history of Engels at the end of the 19th century. Then Lenin also wrote a brief history in the early 20th century. The most complete biography of Engels was written by the German historian Gustav Meyer in the 1920s. This two-volume biography is written in German. An abridged edition of the English translation was published in 1934, a year after Meyer managed to escape to London from the Nazis. After Meyer’s work was published, almost every decade a biography of Engels was published in various languages. At least, there are two types of biographies of Engels that have been written, namely biographies and critical biographies. The first type generally only describes Engels’ life journey from family origins to his death. Engels is shown here more as a person. The second type usually includes an analysis of Engels’ thought and work in the context of Engels’ intellectual journey. Included in this genre, for example, are the works of Terrell Carver,Engels , first published in 1981 (republished 2003) and by JD Hunley, The Life and Thought of Friedrich Engels (1991).

    In the early decades of the 21st century, a fairly popular biography of Engels was published by Tristram Hunt, a historian and activist for the British Labor Party. The biography was first published in England under the title The Frock-Coated Communist: the revolutionary life of Friedrich Engels (2009), then an American edition appeared under the title Marx’s General: the revolutionary life of Friedrich Engels (2010), as well as a French translated edition entitled Engels. , le gentleman révolutionnaire(2011). This book leans towards the historical type of analysis, in which we can find in many places a critical analysis of the context of Engels’ thought and Engels’ role in the development of Marxism. Praised by Marxist historian Eric Hobsbawm as ‘the best biography of one of the most attractive inhabitants of Victorian England, Marx’s friend, partner, and political heir,’ the book is a bestseller. His popularity indicates that people in Europe and America are starting to pay attention to Engels again.

    In addition to Hunt’s writings, there is another biography that appeared at the end of the first decade of the 21st century, namely that of John Green, a journalist and documentary filmmaker. The title is Engels: a revolutionary life. Compared to Hunt’s, this book has received less attention. Maybe because it’s just a resume. The author is not a historian. I have this book as a gift from the author. By the end of 2011, I already had several of Engels’ biographies of the critical analysis type. I’m in the mood to read a biography of Engels which is just a biography of sorts. I emailed the author. Unexpectedly, the author replied and promised to send one of his books. Compared to the Engels biographies that I already have, this book provides information about Engels as a person I did not know before. Two of them are that Engels’ father was also Friedrich Engels and that the junior Engels had been a combat lieutenant in the working class troops in the 1848 revolution in Prussia.

    What I write here, instead of a review, may be more accurately called a summary. Just to commemorate the birthday of Engels.

    Friedrich Engels Before Meet Karl Marx

    On November 28, 1820, Friedrich Engels, a businessman in the most industrialized city on the Prussian Rhineland at the time, Barmen, was waiting for his wife to give birth to their first child. The man hoped that his wife would give birth to a son. However, as the successor to the family business that his grandfather, Johann Caspar Engels, founded in the first half of the 18th century, Friedrich wanted his business to continue. His hopes were fulfilled. According to custom among the elite at that time, the first boy was named after himself: Friedrich Engels. The child grew up in the midst of the fast-paced family business. Since the 1830s, when the child was only 10 years old, the family business has expanded by jointly establishing a textile production and import-export business in the center of the world’s manufacturing industry, England.

    Friedrich directed his son’s education so that he would later represent his business in England. Incidentally, her maternal grandfather, Elise, was a grammar school principal. At the gymnasium school, Engels junior studied Greco-Roman language and literature as well as German literature. Engels junior is an average student. Except for language, he had an affinity for science, and his rebellion against the bourgeois Christian culture of his city. In fact, before taking the graduation exam, junior Engels often wrote criticisms of the conditions of society and its elite morality under the pseudonym F. Oswald. Almost all major European languages ​​are mastered. He also enjoyed reading the works of Enlightenment thought and writers which he devoured, even though he had to steal time to read them. It was his mother who supported Engels junior’s passion for literature, science, and philosophy. The father, on the other hand, saw signs of danger in his son’s academic abilities and interests. He didn’t want his son to be clever. As the first son to inherit his own name, Friedrich insisted his son should be the successor of the family business. Therefore, before his son passed his final exams, in 1837 he sent him for an apprenticeship in the trading company of his friend Heinrich Leupold. There Engels junior helped the company clerk. His job is to record the number of goods that come in and out, read and translate incoming letters, reply to trade letters, and make daily reports on all of it. The trade letters came from the European colonies in the Americas and the West Indies. Most are written in non-German languages. This is where Engels junior deepens his foreign language skills.

    The desire for contemporary thought is not simply crushed by the daily grind of being a scribe. After work, Engels continued his study. Luckily his mother, Elise van Haar, supported secretly sending him the works of German and French scholars.

    As a Prussian royalist, Friedrich Engels senior was proud to send his son into military service to Berlin in early 1842. There, several days a week, junior Engels received military training as an officer candidate, particularly for the municipal artillery division. Later, his knowledge of the army was used in the armed struggle in the 1848 Revolution in southern Germany. He used his days off to attend the lectures of the philosophy professors. In the evening, he wanders around following the discussions of contemporary thought held by the students of the University of Berlin, wabilespecially Hegel’s disciples. At that time, it can be said, the thinking of Georg Wilhelm Friedrich Hegel became a ‘trendy’ thought among educated Germans. In the hands of the interpretation of the monarchy loyalists, Hegel’s ideas became a kind of supporter of the Prussian constitutional monarchy system and Protestantism as its ideological basis. Historically, proponents of this loyalist interpretation were referred to as the Old Hegelians or Conservative Hegelians. On the other hand, there is a small group of scholars who interpret differently. Instead of supporting, they even talk about the restoration of the monarchy and push Hegel’s thinking in a radical direction as a critique. Such people came to be known as the Young Hegelians. This is where Engels junior got the fertilizer for the seeds of his youth rebellion. Engels read David Strauss, Ludwig Feuerbach,

    Encounter with Marx

    After his son fulfilled his mandatory military service in Berlin, the senior Friedrich Engels sent him back to England. It was also horrifying, if the rumors were true, that junior Engels had swam too far in that critical Young Hegelian puddle. Must as soon as possible his soul purified again by the sanctity of the business world. But too late, Engels junior increasingly in the struggle in the world of radicals. In late 1842, while on a trip to England, he became acquainted with Moses Hess, a prominent communist ideologue at the time. At the offices of the Rheinische Zeitung newspaperin Cologne, he was also introduced to Karl Marx, a recently graduated and rejected doctor of philosophy in Berlin and editor-in-chief of the paper. It was with the latter that Engels junior would form an eternal fellowship.

    Instead of being completely devoted to the business world, Engels junior’s political activity escalated. In England he soon made friends with the Chartists, who, a few weeks before his arrival, had led a general strike in England’s industrial triangle of towns (Manchester, Lancasshire and Cheshire). Upon his arrival in Manchester, Engels became acquainted with Mary Burns, also a labor movement activist, who introduced him to the working class world. Engels became increasingly critical. His reading of economics books at the time led to the writing of his first work, Outlines of Political-Economic Criticism , which was published in the first and last edition of the Deutsch-Französische Jahrbücher., the journal of the German emigrant trade unions in France, in 1843. Marx, who had only known him briefly a few months earlier, read this article and probably decided that this was a man worthy of his comrade-in-arms. It is said that it was because of this writing that Marx shifted his direction from philosophical studies to political-economic criticism. That same year, Marx left the Rheinische Zeitung after his newspaper was censored by the government for his critical articles. He went to Paris looking for work. Incidentally, Engels was also on his way there. The two met for the second time and began a lifelong partnership that would shake the world. The first product of this collaboration is the Sacred Family, a collection of polemical treatises addressed to their former Hegelian comrades in Berlin. This book becomes a kind of baptismal water that binds the two as brothers for life.

    From Paris, Engels returned to England. Where the Ermen & Engels joint venture is based, after serving, junior Engels is increasingly wandering into the workers’ settlements accompanied by Mary Burns. The squalid slums of the working class creeping up on the edge of the bourgeois majestic world, the sad stories of child laborers who are paid three potatoes, the high death rate due to poor sanitation and brutal working conditions, convinced him that something was wrong with the economic system. capitalism and the economic ideologies that support it. Unlike Marx, who was inspired by the idea of ​​socialism from his sophisticated world of philosophy, Engels embraced socialism because he came face-to-face with the empirical reality of how capitalism works. Even from his teenage days at Wupperthal. His encounter with socialism was not confined to the working-class housing estates facing capitalism. Official publications, health inspectorate reports, and field notes on the lives of the workers he read carefully throughout 1842-1844. The results of this investigation were offered to be published as a book. In August 1844, pending confirmation of the publication of his book, Engels left Manchester. In February 1845, the French Minister of the Interior expelled Marx. Marx and his family moved to Brussels, the capital of the Kingdom of Belgium. Here, Marx compiled eleven of his legendary theses on Feuerbach’s philosophy of materialism. In April of that same year, Engels arrived in Brussels and met Marx. The two collaborated again to compile a critical treatise on Hegelian philosophy as well as a critique of British political-economic works. From the end of that year to early 1846, they compiled the treatise that became known asGerman ideology . In a treatise that was never published during their second lifetime, Marx and Engels sowed the seeds of their materialist conception of history, which Engels later called Historical Materialism. In the same year, Engels’ ethnographic work on the conditions of the English working class was published in Leipzig in German.

    Have fun with Marx

    Marx and Engels were not arrogant behind-the-scenes thinkers about reality. Both of them were first of all revolutionaries. Their goal has always been to combine theoretical understanding with practical experience to change the world. That is why, it is not surprising that both of them became members of the Justice League, a kind of communist ideology trade union which later changed its name to the Communist League. This league was the forerunner of the German Communist Party and they were both active in it from the start. The heated European revolutionary atmosphere in 1847 prompted Engels to prepare a grid of political and economic programs for the Communist League when the revolution broke out. The treatise was entitled Principles of Communism . Armed with this short writing by Engels, then Marx and Engels compiledThe Communist Manifesto at the request of the Communist League, which published it in February 1848.

    When the revolution broke out in Germany, the secret police made arrests of members of the League. Engels fled to Paris. At the end of 1848, he went to Germany in a hurry. The clouds of revolution are floating in the south. There, the atmosphere of the revolution strengthened. The proletarian militias were formed. A veteran of the Berlin artillery service, Engels was appointed a lieutenant in the armed struggle of the working class. Unfortunately, the workers’ army lost the struggle. The Prussian army pursued the remnants of Engels’ army. Engels himself avoided capture by fleeing to Geneva, Switzerland. From there, Engels slipped into France. To avoid patrols, Engels walked through the French countryside to the nearest port town. At least a month Engels made the trip. At the end of 1849, Engels made it back to England and was reunited with Marx in London. In the midst of disappointment at the failure of the armed struggle in Germany, coupled with urgent financial needs, Engels accepted his father’s offer to return to a position in the management of the company Ermen & Engels. Engels returned to Manchester and busied himself with the managerial work of the company. Since then, his relationship with Marx has been through correspondence. It is said that during the 20 years of their relationship, they have written more than 1300 letters. Engels returned to Manchester and busied himself with the managerial work of the company. Since then, his relationship with Marx has been through correspondence. It is said that during the 20 years of their relationship, they have written more than 1300 letters. Engels returned to Manchester and busied himself with the managerial work of the company. Since then, his relationship with Marx has been through correspondence. It is said that during the 20 years of their relationship, they have written more than 1300 letters.

    The failed revolution of 1848 made the attention of the German, British, Belgian and British intelligence officers to both of them even more stringent. When he suspected that the intel was imminent, in order to protect important information, Engels burned some of Marx’s letters sent before 1851. To avoid arrest, they also often used veiled language in their letters. Includes address and name. For example, since 1852, Marx frequently wrote to Engels under the envelope name James Belfield. The letter was sent not to Engels’ residence, but to an acquaintance’s house in a workers’ settlement.

    In order to deceive the intrepid intel, as manager of a large corporation, Engels publicly presented himself as a parlent businessman, participating as a member and administrator of elite drinking and equestrian clubs, and visiting classical music concerts like a respectable bourgeoisie. But underground, he kept in touch with Irish workers and German immigrant workers in England. His relations with Marx and his fellow Communist League veterans also continued, including with those who emigrated to America. Engels’ attention to European politics also remained strong. While Marx wrote the treatise on the Class Struggle in France and the special case of Louis Bonaparte’s 18th BrumaireReviewing the Revolutions of 1848-1852, Engels focused on an analysis of the failed 1848 revolution in Germany. In 1850, Engels also wrote a review of the history of the Peasants’ War in Germany . In this paper, Engels investigates class warfare in the cloaked conflict of religion in 16th century Germany. Although it looks more like a scholar’s historical analysis, in fact, through this paper, Engels is self-criticizing the failed armed struggle of the contemporary working class so that lessons can be learned from it.

    In 1853, Peter Ermen, the boss of the Ermen company who was also the managing director of Ermen & Engels in Manchester, retired. Ownership of the business went to his eldest son, Godfrey Ermen. This situation also changed the joint venture agreement between the Ermen family and the Engels family. Under a new contract valid for nine years starting in June 1855, Engels junior not only became a manager, but also received a share of dividends from the shares of the company he held personally. Along with the increase in the company’s business, from year to year Engels’ annual income also increased. From 263 pounds per year in 1855, his income rose to 1095 pounds per year in 1859. It was from this abundance of income that Engels was able to help finance his close family, Marx, in London.

    From 1852 to 1857, Marx was the European correspondent for the New York Tribune. His job was to make a review of events in Europe, including the policies of European countries in the colonies. At this time Marx’s burden was quite heavy. The poverty of his family made his children sick. His wages as a columnist are not much. Meanwhile, the European working class movement that was trying to get up again lacked legs to walk and Marx was among those who were trying to rebuild it. Engels helped his best friend as best he could. One of them is by writing a review for Marx’s column using Marx’s own name so that Marx can still receive wages for writing from the newspaper. Engels’ essays on the 1848 Revolution in Germany submitted under the name of Marx, Engels wrote in full. Of course with the approval of the name. Later the collection of essays will be recorded and given the titleRevolution and Counter-Revolution in Germany .

    Marx gave up writing a column for the New York Tribune in late 1857. Throughout 1857-1863, Marx immersed himself again in historical and economic inquiry. His ambition to compile a complete economic treatise was aimed at providing the working class movement with an understanding of capitalism. Engels clearly supported this effort. One of them is by sending Marx money regularly. This financial support from Engels is considered sufficient to support his family. So night and day Marx grappled with the hundreds of works in the London Museum. Marx’s notes throughout the year are disaggregated. One section contains methodological sketches and conceptual foundations on capital and money. This section later became known as Grundrisse. Another section contains a critical review of the economic theories that developed up to his time. This section later became known as The Theory of Surplus Value, whose publication was edited by one of the students and dedengkot of the German Social Democratic Party, Karl Kautsky. These two sections were not written for publication. Only as study material and the actual treatise grid. Therefore, long after Marx’s death these writings were published.

    In 1859, Marx finally published a long essay which was the result of his first investigation into capital. The book was entitled Contributions to a Critique of Political-Economy . Rather than the content, the most famous part of this book is the Introduction-his. There Marx outlined his theory of historical materialism more firmly. The following year, Friedrich Engels senior died. There was a feeling of relief in Engels junior. So far, Engels’ forays into the world of the manufacturing business have only pleased old Engels. Now that he is no longer around, there is a thought to immediately leave the business world which makes him have to live in two worlds. Besides, Geofrey Ermen, the heir to the Ermen family business, seems eager to get rid of junior Engels and sees an opportunity to make it happen when senior Engels passes away. In 1864, corporate turmoil added to Engels’ resistance to staying at Ermen & Engels. Incidentally, the International Workers’ Association (First International) is being formed. Engels and Marx were active in this association until it was dissolved in 1876.

    Meanwhile, in the working-class world, many people awaited Marx’s full economic treatise. Engels was suddenly asked when Marx would publish it. Requests were often addressed to Marx through Engels’ ears. Because it was becoming more and more frequent, Engels had to beg his partner as well. When pressures from various parties within the European working class movement grew stronger for Marx to immediately publish an economic work that would explain the nature and actions of capitalism, Engels was finally able to persuade Marx to publish a first volume of the work, which was planned to consist of six volumes. So in 1867, with Engels’ help in editing, Marx’s first masterpiece, Das Kapital , was published .

    Two years after Das Kapital was published, Engels told Marx about the desire he had harbored since 1860, namely to retire and sell his stake in the Ermen & Engels joint venture. Mid 1869, Engels officially left the company. From the sale of his shares, Engels made a lot of money. The following year Engels moved to London, living not so far from Marx.

    Not long after, the turmoil of the French revolution broke out again. The crisis of capitalism hit the world. The French working class occupied and formed a government based on the ideas of communism, otherwise known as the Paris Commune a few months in 1870. Marx covered this in an essay on the Civil War in France which was published a year later.

    After the Paris Commune was crushed by the combined forces of the aristocracy and the bourgeoisie, the hopes of Engels and Marx’s revolution were shifted to the German working class. However, instead of being revolutionary, the German Social Democratic Party seemed to show signs of being a reformist. In 1869, the Social Democratic Workers’ Party was founded in Eisenach. Ideologically, the party is based on the theory of revolutionary socialism with Marxist organizational principles. In the first half of the 1870s, party membership grew rapidly. At that time, the party was merged with the German General Workers Union led by Ferdinand Lassalle and formed a new body, the German Social Democratic Party. In the party congress in Gotha, Lassallean ideology tends to dominate. At least there is a compromise that tilts the party’s orientation towards reformism. Marx criticized the party’s program as a result of the congress. At the theoretical level, reformism is represented by the thoughts of Eugen Dühring, a Berlin University lecturer who became an intellectual role model for many party leaders. Engels responded to Dühring’s popularity and his eclectic tendencies and hidden ideals by writing a lengthy critique that he wrote from 1876 to 1878. The article was entitledThe Science Revolution Mr. Eugen Dühring . Engels’ ability to dismantle the philosophical foundations of the scientific claims of Dühring’s theory had been honed several years earlier. From 1873 to early 1876, Engels was active in studying scientific findings from almost all branches of natural science that developed at that time. Engels’ study notes during the year were only published in 1925 under the title Dialectics of Nature . Later, these two works were considered as important milestones in Marxist natural philosophy or the elaboration of dialectical materialism in the study of nature. In Dialectics of Nature, there is also an unfinished essay written by Engels on human evolution entitled The Role of Work in the Transition from Apes to Man.. In 1896, this essay was published in the party newspaper, Die Neue Zeit .

    Throughout 1877 to 1882, Marx tried again to complete the following volumes of Das Kapital . The basis of Marx’s character who had the heart to stop writing in order to simply learn Russian so that he could read works on the history of the forms of agricultural communes there in their original language, working on the volumes of Das Kapitalconstantly neglected. The writing breaks continued to lengthen because Marx was busy studying the history of European colonialism. Not only the colony, but also the pre-capitalist society whose territory was colonized. Marx read ethnography and works on Arabs, Berbers, Persians, Javanese, Balinese, Indians, Incas, American Indians, American Negro slaves, and so on. Coupled with the illness which forced Marx to travel to the tropics of north Africa, the complete impossibility of the Das Kapital volumes.it’s done. Engels’ hope was dead that Marx would complete his masterpiece. In 1880, Engels helped Marx compile a list of 100 questions for a study of the conditions of the French working class. Marx’s questionnaire came to be known as the ‘Enquête Ouvrière.’ In the same year, Engels wrote and published Socialism: Utopia and Science . Its contents emphasize which limits socialism is based on mere wish and wishful thinking and which are based on the provisions of scientific investigation.

    Throughout 1881-1882, Marx drowned again in the ocean of anthropology. He reviewed contemporary anthropological works at that time. These notes were later used by Marx as a source of knowledge in understanding how pre-capitalist life was in the context of understanding human society in general. These study notes were later recorded by the Caribbean-born anthropologist Lawrence Krader, who attached the title The Ethnological Notebooks of Karl Marx (1972, Karl Marx’s Ethnological Notes) to the collection. MEGA editors ( Marx-Engels-Gesamtausgabe)the new generation learned that what Krader collected was only a quarter of Marx’s notes and scribbles on anthropology. You can imagine now how much time Marx has spent just reading and how little time he has written the continuation of the volumes of Das Kapital . Everyone became desperate. So did Engels, who covered his annoyance with complaints begging Marx to stop reading and start writing the remnants of Das Kapital .

    Friedrich Engels After Marx Disappeared

    The Das Kapital passages never appeared again in Marx’s life. Marx died on March 13, 1883 in London. At the funeral of his friend, which was attended by only a few people, Engels delivered a brief speech. As a close friend, Marx’s death not only forced Engels to deliver a speech at his funeral. But it also put him under the burden of collecting and tidying up Marx’s handwriting as soon as possible. While collecting thousands of copies of Marx’s handwritten manuscripts which he planned to fill in the unfinished volumes of Das Kapital , throughout 1884 Engels developed Marx’s scribbles and notes on the work of anthropologists, especially The Ancient Society.by Lewis Henry Morgan, into a full treatise and published under the title Origins of the Family, Private Property, and the State . The significance of this book is to dismantle bourgeois myths about the injustice of the family, private property, and the state and to expose the evidence to the contrary. After the book, which had been compiled for only a few months, was published, only then did Engels specifically focus his thoughts and energy on collecting, compiling, and rewriting Marx’s handwriting. In 1885, Engels finished partially editing and published Das Kapital volume II. Time seemed to be running so fast. Engels grew older and realized that there was increasingly limited time to complete all of Marx’s writings. In 1894, Engels published an edit of Das Kapitalvolume III. These works were interspersed with his busy schedule as honorary president of the International Socialist Congress (Second International) since 1893.

    On August 5, 1895, Engels died in London. The cause is esophageal cancer. It is said that Engels made a will that his body would be cremated and his ashes thrown into the sea. That’s why union activists in London cremated his body at the Working Crematorium and dumped his ashes at Beachy Head near Eastbourne.

    Just a Closing

    From the brief history above, it appears that the impact of Engels’ existence was so great for Marx. It was he who baptized Marx into a political-economic critique, which, according to him, was the key to unlocking the capitalist way of thinking and the workings of capitalism. Without an Engels, perhaps Marx’s way of life would be different. Without Engels, perhaps Marx remained a radical liberal until the end of his life or swerved to become a monk because he was disappointed that his revolutionary hopes were repeatedly dashed. Without Engels, perhaps Marx would have been a sad thinker like Nietzsche, who had been haunted by pessimism all his life and constantly blasphemed the world in its entirety as a cursed devil without moving an inch from his boarding room. We know today that Marx was not only a political activist, but also a great thinker without whom the twentieth century would have been different. Millions of political activists claim to have learned a lesson from it. There is not a single modern social science that is not indebted to him. Both as an inspiration and as a most thrilling theoretical opponent. The greatness of Marx made his shadow cover the figure and thoughts of Engels which then looked clumsy in the eyes of some people. To some, Engels was nothing more than a false prophet who chattered among geeks to distort the great teachings of Marx’s thought. Engels appeared to be simply an uneducated man who simply copied and pasted badly the ideas of Marx. The greatness of Marx made his shadow cover the figure and thoughts of Engels which then looked clumsy in the eyes of some people. To some, Engels was nothing more than a false prophet who chattered among geeks to distort the great teachings of Marx’s thought. Engels appeared to be simply an uneducated man who simply copied and pasted badly the ideas of Marx. The greatness of Marx made his shadow cover the figure and thoughts of Engels which then looked clumsy in the eyes of some people. To some, Engels was nothing more than a false prophet who chattered among geeks to distort the great teachings of Marx’s thought. Engels appeared to be simply an uneducated man who simply copied and pasted badly the ideas of Marx.

    However, not everyone has this view. Engels also deserves to be placed on a par with Marx. Instead of understanding the Marx-Engels duo in terms of person number one and person number two, we should interpret it in the context of the division of labor between two people who are equally large. In the second half of his life, for example, while Marx was busy compiling Das Kapital , Engels apparently decided to take over Marx’s work with regard to the development of dialectical materialism as they had sown its seeds since the 1840s into the natural sciences. In this context, Engels’ thought, as contained in the Dialectic of Nature and Anti-Dühring, demonstrated his ability to formulate a materialist foundation for modern natural science. This foundation was then further developed by contemporary Marxist scholars who grappled with the natural sciences (see Grant and Woods, 2002).

    In the social sciences, Alfred G. Meyer, historian as well as sociologist, places Engels on a par with the founders of the sociological discipline such as Comte, Gumplowicz, and Weber, namely as the seed of the great sociological theory. Like any major theory, Engels’ theories about modern social institutions such as private property, the family, the state, and the military are rich in provocative ideas (Meyer, 1989).

    On one occasion, Lenin once stated that ‘it is impossible to understand Marxism or present a complete picture of it without being familiar with all of Engels’ writings.’ How improbable Lenin’s prediction is, can only be known if we begin to become familiar with Engels’ writings themselves. I think reading Engels’ biography is arguably the first step in that direction.***

  • Biography of KH Hasyim Al Asy’ari Founder of Nahdlatul Ulama (NU)

    Biography of KH Hasyim Al Asy’ari Founder of Nahdlatul Ulama (NU)

    KH Hasyim Al Asy’ari is a cleric who founded Nahdlatul Ulama (NU), the largest social organization in Indonesia. He is also the founder of the Tebuireng Islamic Boarding School , East Java and is known as an educational reformer of the pesantren. Apart from teaching religion in Islamic boarding schools, he also teaches students to read general knowledge books, organize organizations, and give speeches.

    The work and services of Kiai Hasyim Asy’ari, who was born in Pondok Nggedang, Jombang, East Java, April 10, 1875, cannot be separated from his ancestors who have led the pesantren for generations. His father’s name was Kiai Asyari, the leader of the Keras Islamic Boarding School in the south of Jombang. Her mother’s name is Halimah. From his mother’s line, Kiai Hasyim Asy’ari is a descendant of King Brawijaya VI, also known as Lembu Peteng, Jaka Tingkir’s father who became King of Pajang (the eighth descendant of Jaka Tingkir).

    Birth And Childhood of KH Hasyim Asya’ri

    Not far from the heart of Jombang, there is a hamlet called Ngedang, Tambak Rejo Village, which used to have an Islamic Boarding School which is said to be the oldest hut in Jombang, and its caretaker Kiai Usman. He is a great kiai, pious and very influential, his wife is Nyai Lajjinah and has six children:

    1. Halimah
    2. Muhammad
    3. awarded
    4. Fadli
    5. Arifah

    Halimah was then married to a student of her father named Asy’ari, at that time Halimah was still 4 years old while Asy’ari was almost 25 years old. They were blessed with 10 children:

    1. Nafi’ah
    2. Ahmad Saleh
    3. Muhammad Hasyim
    4. Radiyah
    5. Hasan
    6. Anis
    7. Fatonah
    8. Maimunah
    9. I pay
    10. Nahrowi, dan
    11. Adnan.

    Muhammad Hasyim , was born on Tuesday 24 Dzulqo’dah 1287 H, coinciding with 14 February 1871 A.D. The time in the womb and birth of KH.M. Hashim Ash’ari, there seems to be a sign that shows his greatness. among them, when in the womb Nyai Halimah dreamed of seeing the full moon falling into her womb , so also when giving birth Nyai Halimah did not feel pain like what a woman felt when giving birth.

    As a child he lived with his grandparents in Ngedang Village, this lasted for six years. After that he followed his parents who moved to Keras Village, located south of Jombang, and in that village Kiai Asy’ari founded a boarding school called Asy’ariyah.

    Principle of early learning , maybe this theory deserves to be carried by him, based on his supportive life, namely living in the pesantren environment, so it is natural that the values ​​of the pesantren are very pervasive in him, as well as the values ​​of the pesantren can be seen how his father and mother provide guidance to them. santri, and how the santri live a simple life full of intimacy and mutual help..

    Learning In The Family

    It was his family’s journey that started him for the first time studying religious sciences from his grandparents. Keras Village brought life changes for the first time for him, here at first he received extensive religious lessons from his father who at that time was the founder and caretaker of the Asy’ariyah Islamic Boarding School. With his intellectual capital and the encouragement of a conducive environment, at a fairly young age, he is already able to understand the religious sciences, be it family guidance, teachers, or self-taught. His dissatisfaction with what he had learned, and his thirst for pearls of knowledge, made it not enough just to study in his family environment. After about nine years in Keras Village (aged 15 years) namely studying with his family, he began his odyssey to study.

    Wandering to Various Islamic Boarding Schools

    At the age of 15, the first journey to study, Muhammad Hasyim studied at the famous boarding schools in Java, especially East Java. Among them are Pondok Pesantren Wonorejo in Jombang, Wonokoyo in Probolinggo, Tringgilis in Surabaya, and Langitan in Tuban (now cared for by KH Abdullah Faqih), then Bangkalan, Madura, under the guidance of Kiai Muhammad Khalil bin Abdul Latif (Syaikhuna Khalil).

    There was a pretty amazing story when KH.M. Hasyim Asy’ari“ngangsu kawruh” with Kiai Khalil. One day, he saw Kiai Khalil sad, he ventured to ask. Kiai Khalil replied that his wife’s ring fell in the toilet, Kiai Hasyim then suggested that Kiai Khalil buy another ring. However, Kiai Khalil said that the ring was his wife’s ring. After seeing the sadness on his teacher’s face, Kiai Hasyim offered to look for the ring in the toilet. Finally, Kiai Hasyim really looked for the ring in the toilet, with full sincerity, patience, and sincerity, Kiai Hasyim finally found the ring. How happy Kiai Khalil was for Kiai Hasyim’s success. From this incident, Kiai Hasyim became very close to Kiai Khalil, both during his time as a student and after returning to society to fight. This was proven by the giving of a stick when Kiai Hasyim was about to establish Jam’iyah Nahdlatul Ulama’ which was brought by KH. As’ad Syamsul Arifin (caretaker of the Syafi’iyah Islamic Boarding School in Situbondo).

    After about five years of studying in Madura (to be precise in 1307 H/1891 AD), he finally returned to Java, studying at the Siwalan Islamic boarding school, Sono Sidoarjo, under the guidance of KH Ya’qub who was famous for his nahwu and shorof knowledge. After a while, Kiai Ya’qub became closer to the santri and became more and more interested in becoming his son-in-law.

    In 1303 H/1892 A.D., Kiai Hasyim who was then only 21 years old married Nyai Nafisah, the daughter of Kiai Ya’qub. Shortly after the wedding, he then went to the holy land of Mecca to perform the pilgrimage with his wife and in -laws. In addition to performing the pilgrimage, in Mecca he also deepened the knowledge he already possessed, and absorbed the new knowledge needed. He studied almost all disciplines of religion, especially the sciences related to the hadith of the Prophet SAW which became his favorite since in the homeland.

    The journey of life is sometimes difficult to predict, happy and sad come alternately. The same goes for Kiai Hasyim Asy’ari in the holy land of Mecca. After seven months of living in Mecca, he was blessed with a son named Abdullah. In the midst of the joy of obtaining the baby, the wife became seriously ill and then died. forty days later, his son, Abdullah, also followed the mother back to Rahmatullah. His grief, which at that time had begun to be known as a scholar, was almost unbearable. The only comforter for his heart was to perform tawaf and other acts of worship that he almost never stopped doing. In addition, he also has a loyal friend in the form of books that are constantly studied at all times. Until finally, he left the holy land,

    Maturity of Knowledge in the Holy Land

    Longing for the holy land apparently called him to go back to Mecca. In the year 1309 H/1893 AD, he went back to the holy land with his younger brother, Anis. Beautiful and sad memories flashed back when his feet stepped back on the holy land of Mecca. But it actually raises a new spirit to be more devoted to worship and explore science. He also visited historic and efficacious places, praying to achieve his goals, such as the Arafah Field, Hira’ Cave, Maqam Ibrahim, and other places. Even the tomb of the Prophet Muhammad in Medina was always a place of pilgrimage for him. He visited great scholars who were famous at that time to study as well as take blessings, including Shaykh Su’ab bin Abdurrahman,

    This tiring effort is not in vain. After many years in Mecca, he returned to his homeland with almost complete religious knowledge, both ma’qul and manqul, as a provision for charity and teaching in his hometown.

    Establishing a Tebuireng Islamic Boarding School

    After returning from the holy land around 1313 H/1899 AD, he started teaching students, he first taught at Pesantren Ngedang which was brought up by his grandfather, as well as the place where he was born and raised. After that he taught in the village of Muning Mojoroto Kediri. This is where he managed to marry one of the daughters of Kiai Sholeh Banjar Melati. Unfortunately, due to various reasons, the marriage did not last long so Kiai Hasyim returned to Jombang.

    When he was in Jombang, he planned to build a boarding school, which he chose a place in Tebuireng Hamlet which at that time was a hotbed of disobedience and chaos. The choice, of course, reaped a big question mark among the people, but all of that was ignored.

    The name Tebuireng was originally Kebo ireng (black buffalo). The story is, In that area there was a buffalo that was immersed in the mud, where there were a lot of leeches, when it was pulled on land, the buffalo’s body had changed its color from reddish white to black which was filled with leeches. It is said that since then the area was called Keboireng which eventually turned into Tebuireng.

    On 26 Robiul Awal 1317 H/1899 AD, the Tebuireng Islamic Boarding School was established, together with his comrades in arms, such as Kiai Abas Buntet, Kiai Sholeh Benda Kereb, Kiai Syamsuri Wanan Tara, and several other Kiai, all the difficulties and threats of the parties involved. hatred towards Islamic education broadcasting in Tebuireng can be overcome.

    KH. M. Hasyim Asya’ri started a tradition which later became one of his privileges, namely the completion of the shakhihaini book “Al-Bukhori and Muslim” held every month of the holy month of Ramadan which is said to be attended by hundreds of kiai who came in droves from all over Java. This tradition continues until now (the teacher of PP. Tebuireng KH. M.Yusuf Hasyim). Initially, the first Pondok Tebuireng santri numbered 28 people, then increased to hundreds of people, even at the end of their lives they had reached thousands, alumni of Pondok Tebuireng who succeeded in becoming great ulama and became high state officials, and Tebuireng became the center of Islamic boarding schools. .

    Establishing Nahdlatul Ulama ‘

    Besides being active in teaching, he is also active in various activities, both local and national. On 16 Sa’ban 1344 H/31 January 1926 AD, in Jombang, East Java, the Jam’iyah Nahdlotul Ulama’ (revival of ulama) was established together with KH. Bisri Syamsuri, KH. Wahab Hasbullah, and other great scholars, with the principle and purpose: “To hold firmly to one of the four schools of thought, namely Imam Muhammad bin Idris Asyafi’i, Imam Malik bin Anas , Imam Abu Hanifah An-Nu’am and Ahmad bin Hambali. And also do whatever makes the benefit of the religion of Islam.” KH. Hasyim Asy’ari was elected to NU’s rois akbar, a title that no one now holds. He also drafted the basic qanun (basic regulations) of NU which developed the ideology ofAhli Sunnah waljama’ah .

    Biography of KH Hasyim Al Asy'ari

    Nahdlatul ulama ‘as a bond of ulama’ throughout Indonesia and teaches jihad for belief with an organized system. It is not easy to unite the ulama ‘who are different in their point of view, but it is not Kiai Hasyim who just gives up, that he sees that the struggle carried out alone will open up a greater opportunity for the enemy to destroy it, either the invaders or those who want to extinguish the light. and Islamic syi’ar in Indonesia, to quarrel with each other. He was a sharp and far-sighted person in this regard, saw the dangers that would be faced by Muslims, and therefore he thought of finding a way out by forming an organization with foundations that can be accepted by other ulama’ulama.

    This Jam’iyah adheres to the ideology of ahlu sunnah wal jama’ah, which accommodates to certain limits the pattern of bermadzhab, which later is more inclined to manhaj than just qauli. In its first decade, NU was oriented to religious and social issues. Activities are directed at issues of education, recitation and tabligh. However, when entering the second decade the orientation was expanded to national issues. This is related to its existence as a member of the federation of the Indonesian Muslim Party and Association of Indonesian Muslims (MIAI) NU and even in its history it has appeared as one of the political parties participating in the election, which later merged with PPP, NU’s role in practical politics was later annulled by the decision of the Situbono Congress which wants NU as a socio-religious organization to return to its khitoh.

    Independence Fighters

    The role of KH. M. Hasyim Asy’ari was not only limited to the field of science and religion, but also in the social and national fields, he was actively involved in the struggle to liberate the nation from the Dutch colonialists.

    In 1937 he was approached by the leadership of the Dutch government by giving a gold and silver star as a token of honor but he refused. Then in the evening he gave advice to his students about the incident and analogized with the incident experienced by the Prophet Muhammad SAW which at that time the Jahiliyah offered him three things, namely:

    • A high -ranking seat in government
    • Abundant possessions
    • The prettiest girls

    However, the Prophet (SAW) refused and even said: “By Allah, if they had the power to put the sun in my right hand and the moon in my left hand with the aim of stopping me from fighting, I would not accept it, even my life is at stake . ” The end of KH.M. Hasyim Asy’ari ended his advice to his students to always follow and set an example from the actions of the Prophet SAW.

    The period of physical revolution in 1940, perhaps indeed was the toughest period for him. During the Japanese occupation, he was detained by the Japanese fascist government. While in detention he was physically tortured so that one of his fingers became disabled . But it was precisely during that period that he carved a sheet in gold ink on the sheet of the struggle for the nation and the Republic of Indonesia, namely by calling for the jihad resolution which he decreed on October 22, 1945, in Surabaya, which is better known as the National Hero’s Day .

    Likewise during the Japanese colonial period, in 1942 Kiai Hasyim was imprisoned (Jombang) and transferred to Mojokerto prison and then imprisoned in Surabaya. He was considered a hindrance to the Japanese movement.

    After Indonesia’s independence In 1945 KH. M. Hasyim Asy’ari was elected as general chairman of the Majlis Syuro Muslimin Indonesia (MASYUMI) party board, he held that position but continued to teach at Islamic boarding schools until he died in 1947.

    Family And Sideways

    Almost simultaneously with the establishment of the Tebuireng Islamic Boarding School (1317 H/1899 AD), KH. M. Hasyim Asya’ri remarried to Nyai Nafiqoh, daughter of Kiai Ilyas, the caretaker of the Sewulan Madiun Islamic Boarding School. From this marriage, Kiai Hasyim was blessed with 10 sons and daughters, namely:

    1. Hannah
    2. Khoiriyah
    3. Aisyah |
    4. Azzah
    5. Abdul Wahid |
    6. Abdul Hakim (Abdul Kholiq)
    7. Abdul Karim |
    8. Ubaidillah
    9. Mashurroh
    10. Muhammad Yusuf.

    Towards the end of 1930, KH. M. Hasyim Asya’ri remarried with Nyai Masruroh, daughter of Kiai Hasan, caretaker of the Kapurejo Islamic Boarding School, Pagu Kediri District, from this marriage, he was blessed with 4 sons and daughters, namely:

    1. Abdul Qodir |
    2. Fatimah |
    3. Chotijah
    4. Muhammad Ya’kub

    The lineage of KH. M. Hasyim Asy’ari (Ninth Grandmother)

    Muhammad Hasyim bin Asy’ari bin Abdul Wahid (Prince Sambo) bin Abdul Halim (Prince Benowo) bin Abdul Rahman (Mas Karebet/Jaga Tingkir) who later held the title of Sultan Hadiwijaya bin Abdullah (Lembu Peteng) who held the title of Brawijaya VI

    The Death of the KH Hasyim Asya’ri

    On the 7th of Ramadan 1366 A.D. at 9 pm, he after leading the Tarawih Prayer, as usual sat in a chair to give lessons to Muslim mothers. Soon after, a guest envoy from General Sudirman and Bung Tomo suddenly came. The Kiai met the messenger accompanied by Kiai Ghufron, then the guest delivered a message in the form of a letter. Whatever the content of the letter, it is clear that Kiai Hasyim asked for time last night to think and the answer will be given the next day.

    However, later, Kiai Ghufron reported that the fighting situation and conditions of the fighters were increasingly cornered, as well as the increasing number of civilian casualties. Hearing the report, Kiai Hasyim said, “Masha Allah, Masya Allah…”then he held his head and was interpreted by Kiai Ghufron that he was sleepy. So the guests said goodbye. However, he did not answer, so Kiai Ghufron approached and then asked the two guests to leave, while he himself remained beside Kiai Hasyim Asy’ari. Not long after, Kiai Ghufron realized that Kiai Hasiyim was unconscious. So hastily, he called his family and stretched Kiai Hasyim’s body. At that time, his sons and daughters were not present, for example Kiai Yusuf Hasyim who at that time was at the headquarters of the fighters, although later he was able to attend and a doctor was brought in (Dokter Angka Nitisastro).

    It was not long before it was discovered that Kiai Hasyim had a brain hemorrhage. Even though the doctor had tried to reduce his illness, God had other plans for his lover. KH.M. Hasyim Asy’ari died at 03.00 am, July 25, 1947, coinciding with the 07th of Ramadan 1366 H. Inna LiLlahi wa Inna Ilaihi Raji’un.

    His departure to his final resting place, was accompanied by deep condolences from almost all walks of life, especially from civilian and military officials, comrades -in -arms, scholars, NU residents, and especially the students of Tebuireng. Muslims have lost their great leader who now lies in his grave in the middle of Pesantrn Tebuireng. At the time of escorting him away, his companions and relatives, KH. Wahab hazbulloh, had the opportunity to present a speech that in essence explained the principle of his life, namely, “fight continuously with no recurrence, and if necessary without rest” .

    Book Works

    Another very valuable legacy is a number of books that he wrote on the sidelines of his life in educating students, protecting thousands of people, defending and fighting for the motherland from colonialism. This is a real proof of his attitude and behavior, his thoughts can be traced in several of his works which are mostly in Arabic.

    But it’s a shame, because of the incomplete documentation, the books that are very valuable disappeared without a trace. Actually, the book he wrote no less than twenty titles. However, only a few titles can be saved, including:

    1. Al-Nurul Mubin Fi Mahabati Sayyidi Mursalin. Study of the obligation to believe, obey, emulate, be sincere, love the Prophet SAW as well as his life history
    2. Al-Tanbihat al-Wajibat Liman Yashna’u al-Maulida Bi al-Munkarat. The study of the birthday of the prophet in relation to amar ma’ruf nahi munkar
    3. Risalah Ahli Sunnah Wal Jama’ah. A study of views on heresy, the Conscience of one of the sects, and the division of the ummah into 73 groups
    4. Al-Durasul Muntasyiroh Fi Masail Tis’a ‘asyaraoh. A study of wali and thoriqoh which is summarized in nineteen problems.
    5. Al-Tibyan Fi Nahyi’an Muqatha’ah al-Arham Wa al-Aqrab Wa al-Akhwal. A study of the importance of friendship between human beings
    6. Adabul ‘Alim Wa Muata’alim. Views on the ethics of learning and teaching in pesantrren education in particular
    7. Dlau ‘al-Misbah Fi Bayani Ahkami Nikah. Study of marriage laws, conditions, principles, and rights in marriage
    8. Ziyadah Ta’liqot. The book contains his polemic with Shaykh Abdullah bin Yasir Pasuruaan
  • Biography of KH. Ahmad Dahlan – Founder of Muhammadiyah

    Biography of KH. Ahmad Dahlan – Founder of Muhammadiyah

    KH Ahmad Dahlan is an Indonesian National Hero who founded the Muhammadiyah organization who was born in Yogyakarta, August 1, 1868. KH Ahmad Dahlan is the 4th child of 7 children from the family of KH Abu Bakar. KH Ahmad Dahlan died on February 23, 1923 in Yogyakarta at the age of 54 years.

    Brief Profile of KH Ahmad Dahlan

    Name : KH Ahmad Dahlan
    Born : Yogyakarta, August 1, 1868
    Died : Yogyakarta, February 23, 1923

    Spouse :
    Hj. Siti Walidah
    Nyai Abdullah
    Nyai Rum
    Nyai Aisyah
    Nyai Yasin

    Son :
    Djohanah
    Siradj Dahlan
    Siti Busyro
    Irfan Dahlan
    Siti Aisyah
    Siti Zaharah
    Dandanah

    Background and Education of KH Ahmad Dahlan

    Little KH Ahmad Dahlan’s name is Muhammad Darwisy, he is the 4th child of 7 siblings. Ahmad Dahlan is the 12th descendant of Maulana Malik Ibrahim or Sunan Gresik. The following is the genealogy of Maulana Malik Ibrahim, Maulana Ishaq, Maulana ‘Ainul Yaqin, Maulana Muhammad Fadlullah (Sunan Prapen), Maulana Sulaiman Ki Ageng Gribig (Djatinom), Demang Djurung Djuru Sapisan, Demang Djurung Djuru Kapindo, Kyai Ilyas, Kyai Murtadla, KH . Muhammad Sulaiman, KH. Abu Bakr, and Muhammad Darwish (Ahmad Dahlan).

    When Ahmad Dahlan was 15 years old, he went on a pilgrimage and for 5 years he lived in Mecca. At this time, KH Ahmad Dahlan began to interact with Islamic reformers, such as Al-Afghani, Muhammad Abduh, Ibn Taimiyah, and Rasyid Rida.

    In 1888, Ahmad Dahlan returned to his hometown and he whose real name was Muhammad Darwisy changed his name to Ahmad Dahlan. He returned to Mecca in 1903 and he stayed for 2 years, at this time Oa had studied with Sheikh Ahmad Khatib who was also the teacher of KH Hasyim Asyari, the founder of NU.

    After returning from Mecca, Ahmad Dahlan married his cousin Siti Walidah (Nyi Ahmad Dahlan), the daughter of Kyai Penghulu Haji Fadhil. From this marriage, they were blessed with 6 children namely Djohanah, Siradj Dahlan, Siti Busyro, Irfan Dahlan, Siti Aisyah, and Siti Zaharah.

    Apart from Siti Walidah, Ahmad Dahlan has also been married to Nyai Abdullah, the widow of H. Abdullah, Nyai Rum who is the sister of Kyai Munawwir Krapyak, Nyai Aisyah who is the younger sister of Adjengan Penghulu Cianjur and from this marriage Ahmad Dahlan has a son Dandanah. And Ahmad Dahlan was also married to Nyai Yasin Pakualaman Yogyakarta.

    Also read : Biography Muhammad Sangidu

    Join the Budi Utomo Organization and Founded Muhammadiyah as well as other organizations

    In 1909, KH Ahmad Dahlan joined the Budi Utomo organization and there he taught religion and the lessons needed by members. The lessons given by KH Ahmad Dahlan were found to be very useful for Budi Utomo’s members, so they suggested that Ahmad Dahlan open a school that was neatly organized and supported by a permanent organization.

    On November 18, 1912 (8 Djulhijah 1330), KH Ahmad Dahlan founded an organization called Muhammadiyah which was engaged in society and education. By establishing this organization, he hopes to advance education and build an Islamic society. Ahmad Dahlan teaches the Qur’an with translation and interpretation so that people understand the meaning in the Qur’an and are not only good at reading and singing it.

    In the field of education, Dahlan changed the pesantren education system at that time. He founded religious schools which also taught general subjects as well as the Dutch language. There are even Muhammadiyah schools such as HIS met de Qur’an. He included religious lessons in public schools as well. Ahmad Dahlan continues to develop and build schools. In addition to school during his life, he also built a mosque, langgar, hospital, polyclinic, and also an orphanage.

    In the field of organization, in 1918 he founded the Aisyiyah organization for women. for the youth, Ahmad Dahlan formed Padvinder or Pandu (now Scouts) called Hizbul Wathan. At the organization the youth learned to march with the drums, wearing shorts, hats, ties, for the uniforms they wear are similar to the scout uniforms today.

    At that time, because all the reforms taught by KH Ahmad Dahlan deviated somewhat from tradition, Ahmad Dahlan was often terrorized like a house being pelted with stones and animal dung even during his dawah in Banyuwangi, Ahmad Dahlan was accused of being a false kyai and he was threatened with death. But with great patience, people slowly began to accept the changes taught by Ahmad Dahlan.

    Everything that was done by KHAhmad Dahlan aims to prove that Islam is a religion of progress that can elevate the status of the people to a higher level and that has had a positive impact on Indonesia, which is predominantly Muslim. Many youths and intellectuals are interested in the methods taught by KH Ahmad Dahlan so that many of them join Muhammadiyah organizations.

    Muhammadiyah, which is a charitable organization and carries out the idea of ​​reforming KH Ahmad Dahlan, has attracted the attention of world Islamic observers. Even writers and scholars from the east focused on Muhammadiyah.

    KH Ahmad Dahlan got a lot of knowledge from many kyai in various fields of science such as KH Muhsin in the field of grammar (Nahwu-Sharaf), KH Muhammad Salih in the field of jurisprudence, Kyai Mahfud and Sheikh KH Ayyat in the field of Hadith Science, KH Raden Dahlan in in the field of astronomy or astronomy, Sheikh Hasan in the field of medicine and animal poisons, and Sheikh Amin and Sayid Bakri Satock in the field of Qur’anic science.

    KH Ahmad Dahlan’s death

    On February 23, 1923, at the age of 54, KH Ahmad Dahlan died in Yogyakarta. Then he was buried in the village of Karangkajen, Brontokusuman, Mergangsan, Yogyakarta. On December 27, 1961, based on the Decree of the President of the Republic of Indonesia No. 657 of 1961 for his services, the state gave him the honorary title as a Hero of Indonesian National Independence.

    Thus the  biography KH. Ahmad Dahlan that we can convey in this article posting, hopefully what we convey can be useful for readers in searching for the complete literature of KH. Ahmad Dahlan.

    Also read : sewa laptop purwokerto

  • Totalitarian Political System, Definition, Type and Characteristics

    Totalitarian Political System, Definition, Type and Characteristics

    The political system consists of several kinds, one of which is the totalitarian political system. Over the years, many countries have experienced transitions in political systems. Initially using a totalitarian political system then changed to a democratic political system.

    So what exactly is the meaning of this totalitarian political system, what are the types and characteristics and which countries use the system. Let’s take a look at the following review of sinaumedia.com .

     

    Understanding Totalitarian Political System

    As a totalitarian term, it was first coined by an Italian dictator named Benito Mussolini. Then along with the development of the times, political scientists used this term to describe the phenomenon of the Soviet Union and the Adolf Hitler Regime, the Nazis in Germany.

    The totalitarian political system is a system of governance that controls society as a whole both at the social, cultural, economic and political levels. In this system the state is not present as a referee but the state is present as the main player.

    That is, there is no clear boundary between the state and citizens. In other words, the state is served by citizens, not the other way around, citizens are served by the state.

    By adopting this system, a country will impose consensus on the community even in situations of internal and external conflict. In addition, the totalitarian system uses state ideology as a way of life in the social order.

    Furthermore, totalitarianism views that individual human existence is not important because for this system a human being is only limited to carrying out his role as a supporter of the ideals of the state.

    There is no freedom of citizens, the government will blatantly eliminate an individual or group of different opinions.

    Sadly, this system will also regulate all aspects of life, from the dress code to the hair style of the citizens of the country. On the other hand, the assessment of good and bad behavior of citizens is also determined by the taste of the state.

    The military, police, communication tools to the media are all under the control of the government. This means that a citizen cannot contribute criticism and suggestions to the government.

    This non-democratic form of government prioritizes ideological indoctrination and the implementation of a government that tends to impose its will.

     

    Types of Totalitarian Political Systems

    Based on the background of its nature, this system is divided into two as follows:

     

    1.Communism

    Communism is an idea pioneered by German philosophers, namely Karl Marx and Friedrich Engels . These two philosophers made a phenomenal work entitled The Manifesto of the Communist Party in 1848.

    Communism itself is a political ideology which believes that society can gain prosperity by eliminating private property. Private ownership in question is ownership of the means of production.

    Thus the means of production are controlled by the state but the state is obliged to ensure the welfare of its citizens by meeting the needs of each of its citizens.

    Based on history, communism is actually a criticism of the capitalist and liberal economic system, which according to him is very exploitative. Despite the fact that communism is trapped in a dictatorial and authoritarian monopoly of power over what they call the proletariat.

    Countries that still adopt this system are China, North Korea, Cuba, Albania, and Vietnam.

     

    2. Fascism

    Fascism is more or less the same as communism, but fascism does not only see the problem of class struggle. They assume that society has experienced chaos and moral decay so that it needs improvement.

    As a system, fascism is an ideology that rejects the narratives of capitalism, liberalism, communism and conservativeism. Fascism is based more on an authoritarian nationalist system of government.

    Countries that adopt a fascist ideological system tend to sacrifice aspects of social life for the sake of the state. Fascism will put the interests of a single party above the interests of the people in the name of the interests of the state.

    However, in practice, Benito Mussolini, the originator of the term totalitarianism, vehemently denied that the fascism that Adolf Hitler practiced was the same as what he did in Italy. For Mussolini Hitler’s racism was not part of the narrative of fascism in Italy because humans were not testing instruments for the benefit of a handful of other humans.

    Fascism is an idea that binds many people with a spirit of nationalism accompanied by pressure and threats. Countries that embraced fascism were the countries of Eastern Europe, West Germany, and the Soviet Union before it collapsed. Fascism clearly rejects parliamentary and democratic methods because these methods will open up space for public participation.

     

    Characteristics of Totalitarian Political Systems

    1. The existence of political repression, namely the state has a more role in regulating and limiting its citizens from participating in the political world.

    2. Aspects of individual and community life become a political concern.

    3. There is only one ruling party. This political party has strong legal force and can control politics as a whole so that competition, recruitment and opposition can be regulated in such a way.

    4. Ideological indoctrination of the people in order to regulate the views of the nation and state and how their political activities are carried out. Indoctrination usually covers all aspects of people’s lives.

    5. There is control over the people’s economy because there is no private ownership and the means of production are wholly state-owned.

    6. There is a limit to express voice. No people can protest or criticize the government.

    7. The existence of control over the mass media so that there is a lack of transparency, the cult of a leader to the arbitrariness of the state against its people.

    8. There is mobilization of the people to get mass support. Usually this mobilization is in the name of democracy so that it seems as if the ruling regime has the legitimacy of the people.

  • Liberal Democracy Political System, Definition, Type and Characteristics

    Liberal Democracy Political System, Definition, Type and Characteristics

    Liberal Democracy Political System is one of the popular political systems after the cold war. Geopolitical changes that accelerate the flow of globalization have resulted in many countries adopting a liberal democratic political system. This is because this political system prioritizes individual freedom and people’s sovereignty.

    So what exactly is this liberal democratic political system, what are its types and characteristics and which countries have adopted this political system as their state system. Let’s look at the full review at Sinaumedia.com below.

    Definition of Liberal Democratic Political System

    Liberal Democracy Political System is a political system that gives freedom to the people at large. People are free individually and in groups to form associations. This means that in a liberal democratic system, individual freedom is the main pioneer in social life.

    On the other hand, government decisions must not violate individual freedoms and rights as stated in the constitution.

    This liberal democracy is rooted in the social contract theory that was born during the Enlightenment by thinkers such as Jean-Jacques Rousseau, John Locke and Thomas Hobbes.

    After the cold war there was a significant shift in the political and economic situation. The flow of industrialization has touched various countries so that the economy crosses borders without knowing territory.

    The advantages of economic power and resources are used by developed countries to spread their ideology. Of course, one of them is a liberal democratic political system. It’s no wonder that liberal democracy is the formula for western countries to become the antithesis of the ideology of Chinese communism.

    The narrative of individual freedom is characteristic of a liberal democratic system. As a result, the highest constitution of this system is held by the people. However, there are things that are prerequisites for a liberal democratic system to work well, one of which is the formation of a stable legislative composition, balanced opposition, and information disclosure.

    In practice, this system places the President as the head of state, and the prime minister as the head of government and the head of the cabinet.

    This system can only work well if the parliament has a balanced and steady composition between the supporters of the government and the opposition. The composition of the government’s supporters and opposition that often changes will mean that the cabinet can be dropped at any time.

    Types of Democracy Based on Their Ideology

    1. People’s Democracy

    People’s democracy is a democratic system based on the notion of communism or socialism in which individual interests have no space at the societal level. The interests of the state and the public interest are important factors in social life.

    In practice, the state has full authority over its people.

    2. Liberal Democracy

    Liberal democracy is a democratic system that places individual freedom as the main pioneer. With this, the state has limited power and is tasked with providing protection for the freedom of its citizens.

    In this system, criticism can be done by anyone and at any time as long as it does not harm others. This means that the government and the opposition are very important instruments for the realization of a stable government.

    Features of Liberal Democracy

    1. The President and Vice President serve as Heads of State

    In a liberal democratic system, the President and Vice President are heads of state, while the government process is carried out by the prime minister.

    2. Policy Based on Majority Decision

    In taking a policy, a liberal democratic system must be based on the majority vote of the people based on the vote in the legislature.

    3. Parliament can control Cabinet

    As a system that places individuals above the government, parliament is certainly able to carry out its role and function as an institution that controls government policies.

    4. There is a General Election 

    The succession of leadership in a liberal democratic system must be through free and open elections. The election results are able to legitimize that the winning government is the people’s choice.

    5. Executive powers are limited by the Constitution, Legislation and Law

    Executive power is limited to avoid abuse of power. In addition, this limitation aims to keep the government on the right track in accordance with the agreement of the state.

    6. Minority Groups Can Fight For Their Groups

    Freedom in a liberal democratic system is not only for individuals but also for groups. As a result, any group with a majority and a minority scale has the same right to freedom.

    7. Allocation of Natural and Human Resources can be controlled

    Natural resources as well as human resources are entirely for the benefit of citizens

    8. Open criticism and votes of no confidence are common.

    In this liberal democratic system, criticism and motions of no confidence often occur either from the public or from the parliament to the cabinet.

    9. The Head of Government is headed by the Prime Minister

    The prime minister runs the government process as well as heads the cabinet.

    10. Prime Ministers and Ministers are appointed and dismissed by Parliament

    In this system, the parliament has control over who is entitled to become a minister.

    11. Legislative is stronger than Executive 

    For the sake of government stability, the legislative role is the key to good governance. As a result, the legislative power is stronger.

    Thus a brief explanation of the political system of liberal democracy, Happy Reading!

  • Alfred Adler’s Theory of Personality Principles

    Alfred Adler’s Theory of Personality Principles

    Alfred Adler was born in the suburbs of Vienna on February 7, 1870 into a Jewish family, and died in Aberdeen, Scotland in 1937 while he was traveling around giving lectures. He earned his doctorate in 1895 from the University of Vienna. He is the second of six children.

    Growing up in an environment where people have all kinds of backgrounds, Adler spent his childhood playing with his peers including Jewish and Gentile children, both middle and lower class. Seems like a long journey with various social aspects of personality that are sourced from his experiences from the start.

    About personality theory

    There are four people who have been instrumental in completing psychoanalytic theory or personality with the views of social psychology in the twentieth century, namely Alfred Adler, Karen Horney, Erich Fromm, and Harry Stack Sullivan. but considering the capacity of the place without reducing the level of balance between reading places and the common thread of each view,

    On this occasion, Alfred Adler‘s view will be described which may be considered the father of the “new social psychology” because since 1911 he had parted with Freud because of problems regarding the theory of sexuality, and began to develop a theory in which social interest and the struggle for superiority became the two pillars. its most important concept.

    Horney and Fromm vigorously resisted psychoanalysis that was too instinctual and maintained the relevance of social psychology variables to personality theory. Harry Stack Sullivan in his theory of interpersonal relationships confirmed the establishment of a personality theory based on social processes.

    Although each theory has its own views and concepts, there are many similarities between them as has been stated by various authors (James, 1947; Ansbacher, 1956).

    Alfred Adler’s theory of Personality 

    According to Adler, living things are a social unit that cannot be separated. They connect themselves with others around them in social cooperation efforts, place the general welfare above their own desires, and get a more powerful lifestyle in social organization.

    Adler has a great contribution to thinking, namely, first, the emphasis on social determinants of behavior, second, the concept of being creative, and third, the emphasis on the characteristics of each personality.

    Adler developed the main points so that they became a special feature of Adlerian thought, namely:

    • Fictional finalism (Life Purpose)
    • Self drive
    • Feelings of inferiority
    • Social push
    • Lifestyle
    • creative power

    Alfred Adler’s Principles of Personality Theory assumes that individuals and their problems in life are always social, such as feeling together with other people and caring about the welfare of that person.

    Alfred Adler’s Theory of Personality Principles

    There are seven principles in Alfred Adler’s theory of personality. The seven principles of Alfred Adler’s Personality Theory explain how Adler views individual psychological conditions.

    1. Principles of low self-esteem theory of personality

    Adler believed that humans are born with feelings of inferiority. This feeling of inferiority stems from children who are unable to perform adult actions. In principle, individuals want to compete with the strengths and abilities of others.

    If at this stage, the individual feels weak and lacking in achieving the above abilities, there will be a sense of inferiority in the next stage of development. Each individual tries to compensate for his weakness in every way. Compensation is determined by lifestyle and efforts to achieve perfection (superior).

    2. Principles of superior personality theory

    Superior is defined as an effort to achieve self-strength. Adler thought that humans are aggressive creatures and must always be aggressive if you want to achieve success. Humans desire power and expect perfection.

    This drive to be superior is universal and knows no bounds. However, being superior does not always have to be in competition with others, but an attempt to leave a sense of inferiority behind.

    3. Principles of lifestyle personality theory

    Individual efforts to achieve superiority require certain ways which are known as lifestyles. Lifestyle consists of impulses from within that regulate the direction of behavior and encouragement from the environment. Encouragement from the environment may be able to increase or hinder the direction of the impulse from within.

    Humans have sufficient power although not completely free to regulate their own lives naturally. No human lifestyle is identical and often determines the quality of interpretation of all experiences encountered.

    4. Principles of creative self-personality theory

    The creative self is the prime mover of behavior. That is to create something new that is different from before. The creative self is a means that processes the facts of the world and transforms these facts into a personality that is subjective, dynamic, unified, personal, and unique because individuals create themselves.

    5. Principles of self-conscious personality theory

    Consciousness is the core of individual personality. Man is aware of everything he does. He can plan and direct behavior toward goals that he consciously chooses. The conscious mind is whatever the individual understands and accepts in helping the struggle to be successful and superior.

    6. Principles of quasi-purpose personality theory

    The past is important but what is more important is the future, namely the plans that individuals will do. Human end goals do not show tangible results will be realized, but only pseudo devices.

    This goal is false because it is made so ideal to be fought that it may not be realized. The purpose of all this is separated from the lifestyle. False goals contain hopes that drive the power of human behavior.

    7. Principles of social interest personality theory

    Humans are born with the gift of universal social interest. This need is manifested in communication with other people. This process takes a lot of time and continuous effort. Individuals are directed to maintain and strengthen feelings of social interest by increasing concern for others through empathy and communication.

    That’s what the author can convey, hopefully it is useful and can be understood easily, see you in the next article, thank you.

  • The Psychology of Group Behavior: A Discussion of Mass Psychology Theory

    The Psychology of Group Behavior: A Discussion of Mass Psychology Theory

    Mass psychology is a branch of psychology that developed in the mid-19th century. This branch of psychology deals with the behavioral and thought processes of both members of the masses and the masses themselves.

    Understanding the Theory of Mass Psychology

    Mass psychology theory is a branch of psychology that developed in the mid-19th century. This branch of science deals with the behavioral and thought processes of both members of the masses and the masses themselves. Mass psychology theory is often influenced by the loss of individual responsibility and views on behavior. universal, both of which increase with the sum of the masses.

    Gustave Le Bon, an influential individual figure who is even considered the father of mass psychology theory, stated that the mass is a group of individuals or humans who are in the same time and place who have the same temporary interest or point of interest.

     

    Draft

    Mass psychology theory is the study of the human psyche, both visible and invisible. The soul that is visible or can be seen is often called behavior, while the soul that is not visible can be in the form of ideas, motives, desires, and potential potentials that exist in humans. We can simply conclude that the theory of mass psychology is a branch of science that studies the soul of a large group of individuals, both visible and invisible.

    The theory of mass psychology was initially developed earlier than the theory of mass psychology and can even be considered as an embryo of mass psychology theory, but because of the level of interest of experts in the masses, the development of mass psychology theory has stagnated and is currently categorized as a branch of psychology.

     

    Application of Mass Psychological Theory

    1. Derived from the theory of mass psychology due to the advancement of mass thought

    Mass psychology theory is a relatively new field of mass psychology theory because of the advancement of mass thought. It uses various theories of critical analysis and investigative mass psychology to develop a working model of psychologists’ perceptions of mass thought experiences.

    The theory of mass psychology is used for individuals as a whole and individually. Mass psychology theory is able to carry out mass thought activities which include consulting, design, and production in various mass minds such as television, video games, films, and news broadcasting.

    It is important to understand that mass psychology theorists are not regarded as those presented in mass thought (such as counselor-psychotherapists, doctors, etc.) but as those who research, work or contribute to the field.

    2. Connect with various other fields of psychological theory

    There is overlap with various fields, such as mass psychology theory of mass thought, communication science, anthropology, education, and sociology, not to mention that within mass psychology theory itself. Most of the research that would be considered ‘mass thought theory of mass psychology’ has come from other fields, both academic and applied.

    3. Relates to behavior in social mass thought

    In the 1920s, individual marketing, advertising and relations professionals began conducting research on behavior and motivation for the application of mass thinking. The use of mass thought during World War II, created a surge of academic interest in mass thought messages and resulted in the creation of a new field, communication science (Lazarsfeld & Merton, 2000).

    4. Dealing with the impact of mass thought impressions

    Mass psychology theory responds to widespread social concerns about children and their television appearances. For example, researchers are beginning to study the impact of television viewing on children’s reading ability. Then, they began to study the impact of violent television viewing on children’s behavior, for example, if they were inclined to exhibit anti-social behavior or to copy violent behavior they saw.

    5. Concerning environmental perceptions of mass thinking

    Mass psychology theory of mass thought includes the user’s perception, cognition, and humanistic components with respect to their experience of the surrounding environment. Mass psychology theory also makes use of

    developmental social and narrative and discover findings from neuroscience. Mass psychology theory and research in mass psychology theory are used as the backbone of mass psychology theory and guide the discipline itself.

    6. Has many dimensions that appear in the minds of the masses

    The theory of mass psychology in mass psychology theory that is applied to mass thinking includes many dimensions, namely text, images, symbols, video and sound. Sensory psychology, semiotics and semantics for visual communication and language, social cognition and neuroscience are among the areas covered in mass psychology theory, this field of social psychology of mass thought.

    7. Determine the content according to the psychological state

    • Mass thinking is based on individual emotions and opinions of character.
    • The content of mass thought is driven from the enjoyment and appreciation of the individual.
    • Individuals form feelings about existing characters, both positive and negative.
    • Mass thinking depends on conflict between characters and how individuals react to conflict.

    8. Having extensive information is no exception

    Mass thinking does not completely exclude external information that surrounds the individual. Rather, the stimuli in the minds of the masses are converted into individual images and memories in order to run the simulation. This explains why individuals can shape these experiences without resorting to mass thinking, as it deals with the relevance of constructs and internal processing.

    9. Setting the framework

    Mass thinking applies a more general framework to the concept of mass thought entertainment. This idea has the potential to offer a conceptual connection that leads to more presence. The mass thought activity of playing exhibitions is consistent with the use of entertainment objects.

    10. Mass thinking provides psychological entertainment & spectacle satisfaction

    Individuals use mass thinking to their satisfaction and how mass thinking changes in individual life according to its content. Mass thinking is used for pleasure and is independent. Individuals influence the thinking of the masses both negatively and positively because they can relate to what is seen in the environment.

    By taking a deeper look at the various forms of mass thought, it becomes clear that the early versions of the belief that mass thought demonstrated each individual’s need for control and a desire to influence their current environment.

    11. Mass thinking can create emotions psychologically

    Dolf Zillmann proposed a two-factor model of emotion. These two emotional factors suggest that emotions involve components of social and cognitive mass psychology theory. Zillmann advanced the theory of mass psychology of “excitation transfer” by establishing an explanation for the effects of violent mass thinking. Zillmann’s theory of mass psychology proposes the idea that viewers are physiologically aroused when they witness aggressive scenes. After witnessing an aggressive scene, the individual will become aggressive because of the passion of the scene.

     

    Critics

    This, combined with the global political and economic impact of mobile mass thinking, suggests that mass thinking will continue to disrupt systems and potentially generate solutions to problems and challenge the imagination.

    Mass psychology theory is indeed uniquely positioned to examine the questions that arise, but in setting best practices and standards for positive and ethical mass thinking and the use of mass thinking, and informing the development of mass thought and mass thinking must be of greater benefit to individuals.

    Emerging thinking includes mass literacy thinking, digital citizenship, mass transthinking storytelling, and the use of artificial intelligence (AI) and the sense of a large amount of data analysis is increasingly available through the emerging fields of data science and data visualization.

    This is what the author can convey, hopefully it will be a quality insight for all readers. Okay friends, see you in the next article, may you always be happy.

  • Types of Bullying and Examples

    Types of Bullying and Examples

    Bullying is an act or behavior that is done to hurt either in the form of verbal, psychological or emotional and can also be in physical form.

    This bullying can be done by a group of people or individuals who feel physically and mentally stronger than the victim.

    The impact of bullying is very large, here are the types of bullying that we need to know.

    1. Physical Bullying

    This type of bullying is the most common type we encounter. Usually the perpetrators of bullying will do physical violence such as pushing, kicking, hitting and others related to the physical.

    The side effect of this bullying is the marks of violence that appear on the body of the victim of bullying. This type of bullying is easiest to report to the authorities because there is evidence of lasting violence.

    2. Sexual Bullying

    It is a type of sexual bullying, whether against a partner or non-partner. This bullying can be done directly, for example, rape, sexual harassment. Or indirectly with words or private messages.

    3. Prejudicial Bullying

    Bullying against certain races and groups, usually the perpetrators of this bullying act by imitating the speech style of the victim, imitating the tribal habits of the victim or by criticizing his race.

    4. Financial Bullying

    Is a type of bullying that forces the victim to spend money or valuables belonging to him. Examples such as harassing, pointing, embezzlement of funds and others.

    5. Cyber ​​Bullying

    This type of bullying is usually done on social media such as the internet. An example of a case is the perpetrator commenting negatively on the victim’s post or terrorizing the victim.

    6. Verbal Bullying

    Verbal bullying is often associated with cyber bullying, even more cruel. Usually the victim who is affected, will prefer to be alone and hide the problem.

  • Psychodynamic Therapy: Benefits – How it Works and Examples

    Psychodynamic Therapy: Benefits – How it Works and Examples

    In psychology, there are various forms of application to help individuals with certain psychological disorders. One of them is psychodynamic therapy which is part of psychotherapy. Through various processes of communication with the therapist, exercises, doing assignments, and so on, psychodynamic therapy can lead individuals to find solutions to their own problems.

    In general, psychodynamic therapy does look similar to psychoanalytic therapy which uses deep communication based on psychoanalytic theory. However, this therapy tends to place less emphasis on the therapist-patient relationship and tends to be shorter than psychoanalytic therapy. The following is a further explanation of psychodynamic therapy.

    Definition of Psychodynamic Therapy

    According to Yakeley (2014), psychodynamic therapy is seen as therapy with a broader perspective than psychoanalysis and includes relationships by including interpersonal experiences that are manifested in the social world and the internal world. Both are built or arise from vulnerabilities in oneself and childhood experiences.

    Gatta, et al., (2019) translate psychodynamic therapy as a form of psychotherapy whose focus is devoted to the interaction between mental processes that occur due to individual subjective experiences at the beginning of the problem so that the goal is to increase the patient’s ability to understand the meaning of the experience.

    Meanwhile, as reported by Good Therapy , psychodynamic therapy is a psychological interpretation of mental and emotional processes that originate from the interrelation of objects, ego and psychological self with the aim of overcoming basic conditions and the formation of psychological processes.

    Benefits of Psychodynamic Therapy

    Psychodynamic therapy has various benefits not only to cure symptoms of psychological disorders, but also to increase self-esteem , confidence, and confidence to function optimally. Here are some details of the benefits of psychodynamic therapy, including:

    • Helping individuals to rebuild their self-esteem and self- confidence.
    • Develop individual abilities in order to have more satisfying relationships.
    • Making individuals more confident in their own abilities to be able to do what they want well.
    • Increase the ability to understand yourself and others.
    • Become more sensitive and tolerant of a wider range of emotions, not just primary ones.
    • Gradually can be more able to face the problems and difficulties that occur in life.
    • Helps with symptoms of depression, anxiety, and physical ailments related to stress.
    • Life as a whole will gradually get better because these benefits work to the fullest over time.

    How Psychodynamic Therapy Works

    Reporting from Talking Therapy , psychodynamic therapy has a quite different way of working from other psychotherapy, namely by focusing on understanding and expressing feelings and how individuals try to avoid thoughts, feelings that cause disturbances, and how they relate to experiences or other people.

    In addition, psychodynamic therapy also tries to help the patient to be able to understand for himself how he suppressed previous emotions that affect the way he makes decisions, behaves, and establishes relationships with other people at this time.

    Psychodynamic therapy not only focuses on the problems faced by the individual within himself, but also helps the patient to be more alert and understand the origin of the social problems that occur. However, that does not mean that the patient will be able to solve the problem on his own.

    Patients will be given direction that can lead to the ability to analyze and resolve current issues that are currently happening and change their behavior in current relationships through in-depth exploration as well as analysis of previous experiences or emotions.

    Examples of Application of Psychodynamic Therapy

    According to the American Psychological Association, the application of psychodynamic therapy begins with building a relationship between the therapist and patient as a doorway to carry out a series of psychotherapy processes. Initially, the therapist will try to understand the nature of the relationship that exists in the patient’s life.

    The pattern of this relationship is related to the emotions, thoughts, and beliefs that are related to him at this time and can then be searched for its relationship with the patient’s life experiences in childhood. This is because psychodynamic theory emphasizes the importance of early life.

    The initial application of psychodynamic therapy is intense with sessions that are scheduled for about an hour and last for several months to years. Later, this method was changed to modern psychodynamic therapy so that it is not more intensive. In addition, the use of certain sofas is also changed to a pair of ordinary chairs and the therapist can also do face-to-face instead of hiding.

    In the session, the therapist will encourage the patient to talk freely about anything about his conscious mind. Then, the therapist will investigate the recurring pattern in the client’s subconscious mind. That way, the patient can be aware of things that were previously unconscious.

    As a result, patients can identify the important puzzle pieces that make up their present self and put them back together to allow patients after therapy to maximize their functioning and have an awareness of the positive things in their lives.

    Discussion Conclusion

    Psychodynamic therapy can be defined as a psychotherapy technique based on psychoanalytic theory that emphasizes associations within individuals both with their emotions and thoughts or with interpersonal relationships in everyday life through deepening related experiences in early life so that they are able to overcome the problems they face themselves.

    Generally, this therapy is useful for dealing with psychological disorders, such as anxiety or depression and also restoring self-confidence to live well through the ability to analyze oneself and environmental conditions. How, the therapist will encourage individuals to be more aware of their current condition and behavior.

    An example of the application of psychodynamic therapy is where the patient freely tells what he is feeling to the therapist. Then the therapist will arrange a recurring pattern that appears and directs the patient to rearrange the things that affect him until he is in his current condition.

  • The 6 Safest Steps to Telling Bad News

    The 6 Safest Steps to Telling Bad News

    Your score is bad. Or you lose your cellphone, and are afraid to tell your parents. You want to break up with a girlfriend. If you’re honest, you’ll be scolded. If it’s a lie, it’s not good. How are you? It’s a way of telling bad news without over-emotionalizing the other person.

    1. Calm down first

    You have chosen to be honest. This is the right attitude. If this bad news happened because of you (losing things, not doing your job), you have to be prepared with the consequences. Fatal mistakes, as subtle and as good as they are, will surely have consequences.

    2. Just do both

    If you want to give bad news, you should tell the people who are interested. If there are other people, I’m afraid that this person will complicate things, and their emotions will get out of control.

    3. Start with small talk

    Before delivering bad news, you need to start with small talk.

    Speak lightly. Its function is to read the emotions of your interlocutor later. If your emotions aren’t good, for example, you’re upset, you may need to postpone telling them about the bad news.

    In addition, small talk can reduce anger or emotions from the other person you are talking to later.

    4. Be honest, don’t blame other people or circumstances

    If this bad news happens because of your actions, for example your grades are bad because you never study, just answer honestly. Likewise if for example your parents are called teachers. If it’s your fault, tell the truth.

    If you blame other people, for example blaming the teacher, blaming your boyfriend, blaming the situation, or blaming anything, you look like a coward. Parents also don’t like it when you blame other people.

    Honestly, I was scolded. But if you lie / hide and keep getting caught, the lie is even worse. People prefer to be told the truth. There’s research .

    Be honest and admit it. Mention your mistakes anywhere, and face the consequences like an adult .

    5. Understand the feelings of others

    Another way to tell bad news is to understand the other person’s feelings.

    When delivering bad news, there must be a negative reaction from the other person.

    For example, if you lose something, your parents might scold you. Behind the anger there is actually a sense of disappointment.

    For example, if you tell your parents about your boyfriend, your parents may be angry because they don’t believe you. Or maybe they see that your boyfriend is a bad boy, it’s not true .

    For example, if you want to break up with your boyfriend, maybe your girlfriend’s anger is because of… various things. Eh maybe because he thinks you are his soul mate and you are destined to be together. There is a desire to continue to have you, even though the way may be wrong.

    Whatever it is, try to understand the basics of why other people get emotional. Imagine if you were your interlocutor. By understanding the other person’s feelings, you will be able to move on to the next stage.

    6. Apologize and offer a solution (if this bad news is because of you)

    Be quiet and listen to the anger of the other person you are talking to. They deserve to express their emotions first.

    Remember, if you make a mistake, your job is to apologize. Do it as best and sincerely as possible. If your apology is not accepted, that’s their right.

    After apologizing, offer a possible solution. For example, you are willing to cut your pocket money so that your cellphone is replaced. Or if because of bad grades, then you offer to take lessons. Show your responsibility.

    Or any punishment, as long as you deserve it, then accept it bravely.

    Remember, don’t bid!

    Well, that was a way of telling bad news. Want to tell your partner, parents, or anyone else, the point is to prepare yourself, tell the truth, admit mistakes, understand the feelings of the other person, and take responsibility.

  • Classical Conditioning Theory – Pavlov’s Learning Theory

    Classical Conditioning Theory – Pavlov’s Learning Theory

    What is classical conditioning theory? What is the explanation of classical conditioning like? How is classical conditioning applied in everyday life? We discuss all here.

    Have you ever drooled at the thought of the food you crave? Or shudder at the thought of the animal you fear? Or do you feel angry just because you hear the name of the person you hate being called in front of you?

    Why do people have phobias ? Why do we remember our ex when we smell a certain perfume?

    In psychology, you’ve experienced classical conditioning. Classical conditioning  we will study together in this article. Including its history, the process of its occurrence, and how this classical conditioning occurs in our lives.

    Let’s discuss!

    Classical Conditioning Definition

    So what is classical conditioning actually?

    According to psychology, classical conditioning  is a learning theory that was discovered by Ivan Pavlov  , a doctor from Russia.

    Pavlov revealed that we can produce a response by combining two stimuli; natural stimulus and artificial stimulus.

    In ordinary situations, this artificial stimulus does not produce any response. But when combined with a natural stimulus many times, this artificial stimulus will eventually produce the same response as the natural stimulus.

    Confused?

    I’ll give you an example. You can do this too, the ingredients are pretty easy to find. You need an unused friend and a straw.

    Sit next to your friend, and, using signal 123, blow your friend’s eye with a straw. Just go slow, if you’re too tight, your spit will splash into his face.

    What happened? Your friend will probably squint because the blast is annoying.

    Do this several times. On cue, then blow. See the response.

    After a few times, when you say the cue, what is your friend’s response? Squinting right?

    Well, in this case, the wind being blown is a natural stimulus, and squinting when blown is a natural response.

    But here we add an artificial stimulus, namely the cue. Before the experiment, maybe our friend didn’t respond when we said 1,2,3, in front of his face. But after conditioning many times, hearing the signals 1-2-3 was enough to make him squint.

    When he squints before we blow, we’ve done classical conditioning.

     

    History and Development of Classical Conditioning

    Classical conditioning is a theory that is within the flow of behavioristic psychology. Behaviorists, as we know, believe that individual behavior is caused by different learning experiences.

    John Watson, a leader in the behavioristic school, once said:

    “Give me a dozen healthy infants, well-formed, and my own specified world to bring them up in and I’ll guarantee to take any one at random and train him to become any type of specialist I might select – doctor, lawyer, artist, merchant-chief and, yes, even beggar-man and thief, regardless of his talents, penchants, tendencies, abilities, vocations and the race of his ancestors”

    “Give me a dozen healthy babies, and give me a world of my own to raise them. And I can take any baby at random and mold him into any specialist I choose – doctors, lawyers, artists, chief merchants and, yes, even beggars and thieves, regardless of talent, inclination, inclination, ability, calling and ancestral race.”

    Behaviorists believe that our personality is formed by experiences and the environment around us. And Pavlov’s classical conditioning confirms this belief.

    Advertisement!

    Pavlov himself was not a psychologist. He’s a doctor. In fact, this classical conditioning was discovered by accident.

    In the 1890s, Ivan Pavlov studied the salivation of dogs in response to being fed. He put a small test tube in each dog’s cheek to measure the saliva when the dog was fed (with a powder made from meat).

    At first Pavlov thought the dogs would salivate in response to the food in front of them, but he noticed that the dogs started drooling whenever they heard his assistant’s footsteps bringing food.

    When Pavlov discovered that any object or event that the dog thought had something to do with food (such as a lab assistant) would trigger the same response, he realized he had made an important scientific discovery.

    Therefore, he devoted the rest of his career to studying this conditioning.

     

    Classical Conditioning Theory Concepts

    Behaviorism is based on the assumption that:

    • All learning occurs through individual interaction with the environment
    • Environment shapes our behavior

    One thing that is typical in classical conditioning is that there is a neutral signal before the reflex.

    In Pavlov’s classic experiments with dogs, the neutral signal was a natural pitch and reflex sound (salivating) in response to food.

    In our experiment, the neutral signal was a 1-2-3 cue and a natural reflex (squinting) in response to wind hitting the eye. By associating a conditioned stimulus (the cue) with an unconditioned stimulus (blowing the eye), the cue can produce a squinting response.

    But of course classical conditioning is not that simple.

    There is a phase where our friend stops squinting after the signal. It could be, a few days after you start working, your friend’s squinting response appears again.

    To understand more about how classical conditioning works, we need to get to know some of its basic principles.

    Let’s take a closer look at the five main principles of classical conditioning:

    1.Acquisition

    Acquisition is the initial stage of learning. This appears response time first appears and is gradually amplified. During this acquisition phase, the conditioned stimulus (the cue) is repeatedly followed by the unconditioned stimulus (blowing the eye).

    A natural stimulus is something that will naturally trigger a response without the need for learning. If the conditioning process is carried out, the subject will begin to respond to a stimulus that was initially neutral. Since this stimulus has already produced the expected response, it is now called  a conditioned stimulus . It is at this point that we can say that a response has been obtained.

    For example, you condition your friend to squint in response to a signal. You repeatedly pair the cue with the blink of the eye. A response is said to have been obtained immediately if your friend starts squinting in response to the signal.

    Once the response is established, you can gradually amplify the squinting response to ensure the behavior is properly conditioned.

    2. Extinction/Kepunahan

    Extinction or extinction is the reduction or disappearance of the response that we have conditioned. In the case of classical conditioning, this occurs when the conditioned stimulus is no longer accompanied by the unconditioned stimulus.

    If you just give a signal without being followed by a blast, after a long time your friend will not respond anymore.

    3. Spontaneous Recovery

    Sometimes, a learned response may suddenly reappear even after a period of waning in the response. Spontaneous recovery is the reappearance of a conditioned response after a period of pause.

    In this case, imagine that you stop signaling in front of your friend’s eyes. After he doesn’t squint anymore (the response is extinct), give him a break for some time, about 15 minutes. If you suddenly say the cue again, the extinct response can reappear.

    This is called spontaneous recovery, or spontaneous recovery.

    But the response will be extinct again, if the conditioned stimulus (squinting) is not followed by the unconditioned stimulus (blowing).

    4. Stimulus Generalization

    Stimulus generalization is the tendency of the subject to respond to a similar conditioned stimulus.

    For example, after being conditioned, your friend may continue to squint even if the cue is replaced with clapping or hand signals.

    5. Stimulus Discrimination

    Discrimination is the ability to distinguish a conditioned stimulus from another stimulus that has not been paired with an unconditioned stimulus.

    If before that you started with a signal, try starting with a knock on the table.

    Your friend may not squint, because there are different forms of stimulus. Discrimination involves the ability to distinguish between types of signals. Since the subject is able to distinguish between these stimuli, he or she only responds when the conditioned stimulus is presented.

    Responses 4 and 5 may depend on the subject’s perception. If he equates all the signals, it means that even with a knock on the table he will respond (generalize). But if he really focuses on one response, he will ignore other stimuli (discrimination).

     

    How Does Classical Conditioning Work?

    So what is the process of classical conditioning?

    You may already have an idea, but I’ll explain in more detail.

    The classical conditioning process occurs in three phases:

    Phase 1: Before Conditioning

    The first part of classical conditioning requires an unconditioned stimulus, which, if done, will elicit a response. An example is squinting, it’s a reflex because the eyes are blown.

    This blow is called an unconditioned stimulus, because this stimulus already produces a response without having to be conditioned.

    During phase 1, the unconditioned stimulus (UCS) produces an unconditioned response (UCR).

    In this phase there is a stimulus that has not yet produced a response. This stimulus, if not paired with UCS, doesn’t produce the response you want.

    Let’s say in our research you want to make your friend squint. If you want to give a signal until your mouth is dry, if you don’t blow your friend’s eyes, he won’t squint.

    This cue is what we call a conditioned stimulus. Called conditioned, because we will condition our friends to respond to this stimulus. If we haven’t conditioned our friend, then this stimulus has no response.

    Phase 2: During Conditioning

    This is the second phase of the classical conditioning process. In this phase, the conditioned stimulus will be given to the subject and then followed by the unconditioned stimulus. This is done repeatedly.

    As a result of this sequential stimulus, your friend assumes that CS and UCS will always occur sequentially.

    Here, the stimulus that previously did not produce a response will slowly elicit a response.

    Phase three: After conditioning

    This is the final stage of conditioning. A conditioned stimulus that previously did not provoke a response, because it is always associated with a natural stimulus, can finally trigger a response. In this case squinting on cue. This response we elicit is called a conditioned response.

    It is called a conditioned response because it is the result of our conditioning, not a natural reflex.

    This is an example of classical conditioning.

     

    Research Related to Classical Conditioning

    Little Albert’s Research

    Ivan Pavlov  studied classical conditioning in his pet dog. Even so, it turns out that humans can also be conditioned.

    In a famous (though now outlawed) experiment, Watson and Rayner (1920) demonstrated just that.

    Little Albert is a 9 month old child who is tested on his reactions to various stimuli. He was shown a white mouse, a rabbit, a monkey and various masks. Albert is described as “not responding emotionally,” unafraid of these stimuli.

    However, what shocked and scared him was the hammer being hit against the iron rod. This loud sound made little Albert cry.

    Two months later, Little Albert was 11 months old. The white mouse was presented again, and a few seconds later a hammer was struck against the iron. This was done seven times over the next seven weeks, and it always brought Albert to tears.

    Since then the little Albert would be scared every time he saw a white mouse.

    Furthermore, it turned out later that he had a phobia of things that were hairy and white, such as dogs, fur coats, cotton wool, and even white beards. This is called generalization, which we discussed briefly earlier.

    Watson and Rayner showed that classical conditioning can lead to phobias.

    Over the following weeks and months, Albert was observed and after ten days post-conditioning, his fear of mice was much less. The process of extinction of the conditioned response is called extinction.

    But the remnants of conditioning remain. Even the conditioned response can be regenerated by reconditioning, with a shorter time span than the initial conditioning.

     

    Classical Theory of Conditioning in Life

    You may have certain phobias that make friends laugh. I have a friend who cries when she is scared by worms. Another friend of mine, his legs tense up and get goosebumps when there is a cat.

    A friend of mine doesn’t want to go to a mall, just because he was dumped in that mall. Entering the mall makes him sad, he said. Surem, his face is scary but his heart is like Hello Kitty.

    Why do people have an illogical fear of something harmless? Why do places that we think are normal, according to other people can make us sad and upset?

    Many responses arise as a result of classical conditioning. Intense and unforgettable events make us respond to similar stimuli in an exaggerated manner.

    For example, my friend who was decided. Maybe for him, being dumped by the girl he loves has a tremendous impact on his subtle feelings. The incident may be repeated in his mind, so that he unconsciously did classical conditioning himself.

    The mall where he was dumped, he unwittingly translated as a conditioned stimulus. Responses in the form of sadness and confusion over time became a conditioned response every time they saw the mall.

    Another example is my friend who has a phobia of cats. The cat phobia arose because he had seen a cat give birth as a child. Blood and mucus everywhere imprinted so intensely on his memory, it made him disgusted every time he saw a cat.

    Disgust, which is an unconditioned response to seeing mucus and blood, has long been associated with cats. The cat here is a conditioned stimulus, and disgust eventually becomes a conditioned response every time you see a cat.

    Classical conditioning is not only seen in phobias. PTSD is also believed to be caused by a process similar to this conditioning.

    Posttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD), suffered by war veterans and disaster survivors with traumatic experiences, can trigger the formation of classical conditioning. Even years after the event has passed, veterans may feel fear and anxiety at stimuli such as loud noises (Roberts, Moore, & Beckham, 2007; Schreurs, Smith-Bell, & Burhans, 2011; Rosellini et al., 2015).

    Classical conditioning can also be associated with pleasurable experiences.

    For example, you are excited every time you hear a certain song. Or the smell of your boyfriend’s perfume that still lingers on your jacket. Happy emotions can arise because there are positive memories that are intense and imprint on your brain.

    Oh yes, Pavlov’s learning theory also explains why addiction is so difficult to deal with.

    Drug addicts associate certain stimuli — such as a drug device such as a syringe, the smell of a drug, or the room where they use the drug — with the pleasurable feeling that the drug produces.

    Just looking at a syringe is enough for an addict to trigger a craving reaction (Saunders, Yager, & Robinson, 2013; Valyear, Villaruel, & Chaudhri, 2017).

     

    Criticism of Pavlov’s Theory of Learning

    Classical conditioning was a major breakthrough of its time. In fact, this research made Ivan Pavlov one of the most influential psychological scientists of the 20th century .

    But that doesn’t mean the theory is flawless.

    Classical conditioning overemphasizes that we learn and develops because of the environment, and pays less attention to complex aspects of ourselves as humans.

    In addition, scientists also argue that this approach in analyzing behavior tends to be reductionist, meaning that our complex actions are then simplified into stimulus and response.

    Even to explain human behavior, classical conditioning is also classified as reductionist. Called reductionist because behavior, which is a complex process, is broken down into simple stimulus-response.

    Proponents of the reductionist approach say that this is scientific, because this reduced behavior allows it to be measured. But there are also those who argue that the reductionist view is less valid. Thus, although reductionism can be measured, it may lead to an incomplete explanation.

    Why is it incomplete?

    We come to the last drawback of Pavlov’s theory: it is deterministic.

    This theory emphasizes that humans or other organisms behave in response to external stimuli, and counteract individual free will.

    Two people with the same upbringing and social environment can still be two different people. A bad environment with high poverty can breed criminals, but also many athletes are born from this kind of situation. And behaviorists have difficulty explaining this kind of phenomenon.

    The deterministic approach actually has the potential to guess and predict human behavior in response to something.

    However, this deterministic approach underestimates the uniqueness of the human person and their ability to choose.

    Yes, that was the explanation about classical conditioning theory, Pavlov’s learning theory. In the end, a single theory of learning is not enough to explain us and our souls. Next time we will discuss the second learning theory, namely operant conditioning.

    I’ve actually discussed Bandura’s Social Learning theory , but this should be the last one. The order is messy, hahaha.

    But for the time being I want to write something else, which is a bit lighter.

     


    Reference:

    https://www.verywellmind.com/classical-conditioning-2794859

    McLeod, S. A. (2018, Oct 08). Pavlov’s dogs. Simply psychology: https://www.simplypsychology.org/pavlov.html

    Feldman, R., 2019. Essentials Of Understanding Psychology. New York: McGraw-Hill Education.

  • The Science of Motivation: Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs Explained

    The Science of Motivation: Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs Explained

    Abraham Maslow was a humanist. This is what makes Abraham Maslow believe in the statement that every individual has a desire to make himself at the top level. However, to reach this level there are other levels that must be met.

    Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs Theory contains the level of needs that must be met by each individual. Individuals referred to in this theory are humans. As We knows, humans are weak creatures and will certainly continue to develop to find their strengths in an effort to meet their needs.

    This theory contains five levels of needs that must be met at each level. The level of needs begins with basic needs such as human physiological needs, the need for security, the need to feel love, the need for achievement, and the top level is the need for self-actualization. This hierarchy of needs is formed in the form of a triangle with the base having a wider aspect coverage than the cone part. The following is an explanation and sequence of the Hierarchy of Needs Theory by Abraham Maslow.

    Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs Theory contains the level of needs that must be met by each individual. Individuals referred to in this theory are humans. As We knows, humans are weak creatures and will certainly continue to develop to find their strengths in an effort to meet their needs.

    This theory contains five levels of needs that must be met at each level. The level of needs begins with basic needs such as human physiological needs, the need for security, the need to feel love, the need for achievement, and the top level is the need for self-actualization. This hierarchy of needs is formed in the form of a triangle with the base having a wider aspect coverage than the cone part. The following is an explanation and sequence of the Hierarchy of Needs Theory by Abraham Maslow.

    Abraham Maslow
    Abraham Maslow

    1. Basic Needs or Physiology

    This first basic level need has a relationship with the needs of each individual’s body, both biological and physical needs. This very basic need must first be met so that humans can survive and move to the next level of needs. Physiological needs are human needs for oxygen, water, food, normal body temperature, sleep, homeostasis, sexual needs, and the like.

    Basic Needs or Physiology- eati
    Food is one of Basic Needs or Physiology example. Source: tanboykun (YT)

    We can reason, an individual may not be able to meet the next level of needs if they have not met these basic physiological needs. It should be remembered that if one part of this physiological need cannot be met, it will automatically interfere with the achievement of the fulfillment of the needs at the next level. Of course this will be different from those who are destined to be rich, eating food is no longer their physiological need. However, they consider eating expensive food is their way of life.


    2. The Need for Security

    The second basic need is the need to always feel safe. An individual can move to the next level of need if he has successfully met the needs at the first level. Abraham Maslow explained that this need for security includes both physical and emotional security. Please note, the level of need at this level is more for the age range of children. This is because children still have a low level of alertness, so the assistance of older people is very much needed.

    The need for security can be exemplified by examples such as the need for a sense of security from the dangers that will threaten, the need for protection from crime, the need for security from the threat of disease, the need for a sense of security from the dangers of natural disasters, and so on.


    3. Social Needs (Love, Compassion, and Property Rights)

    The third level needs are needs regarding social aspects that exist in society, such as the need to feel love, affection, and have the right to ownership of something. In this level, Abraham Maslow gives his opinion on the reasons why an individual seeks love. Abraham Maslow explained the background of this aspect because it is based on loneliness, loneliness, depression, stress, and excessive anxiety. There are two types of love possessed by an individual, namely D-Love or Deficiency and B-Love or Being.

    Social Needs (Love, Compassion, and Property Rights)
    Social Needs (Love, Compassion, and Property Rights)

    Someone who feels love due to lack, it will be included in the type of D-Love. D-Love itself is often described as a love that makes oneself the focal point. While for B-Love is a form of assessment of an individual without any intention to take advantage of loved ones. Love is tangible like love that there is no desire to have, only supports the person to be better, and love that can have a positive impact on both parties, usually can be exemplified when an individual establishes a friendship with another individual or group.

    In addition, the needs at the third level also include the need to be able to make friends with other individuals, form a family, socialize with a group, adapt to the surrounding environment, and be in the community. Like the previous needs, this third level of needs can be achieved if an individual succeeds in satisfying their needs at the previous level.


    4. The Need for Appreciation

    The next level of needs, namely the fourth level is the need for appreciation. The award referred to in this level of need is not always an award in the form of trophies or prizes. The meaning of the word appreciation here is self-esteem. Yep, every individual deserves their self-respect. Self-esteem can come from oneself or others. When the needs at this level can be met, it will automatically bring up the need to feel respect, to be trusted by others, and to stabilize oneself.

    From that, we can conclude that this need is about rank, title, and profession. After an individual successfully fulfills it, the individual’s self-confidence will automatically skyrocket. A high level of self-confidence will certainly affect the social role of the individual. On the other hand, if these needs are not met, it will have serious impacts such as depression, anxiety, stress, lack of self-confidence, inferiority, feeling useless, and so on.

    Appreciation
    Appreciation

    Self-esteem is divided into two forms, namely:

    4.1 Forms of self-respect

    having confidence in oneself, achieving achievements, being an independent person, having the ability, and competent competence.

    4.2 Forms of appreciation from others

    get status, titles, ranks, positions, become famous people, get appreciation for the hard work done, get praise, be judged well by others.


    5. The Need for Self-Actualization

    The highest level needs, namely the need for self-actualization. This need can be achieved if an individual successfully fulfills the four previous needs. Self-actualization can be interpreted as a real form to reflect the hopes and desires of an individual towards himself. In the description of self-actualization given by Abraham Maslow, this self-actualization acts as an individual’s need to decide their desires.

    If We is still confused with the image of self-actualization, then we will give examples such as if an individual is a musician then he should go to make music, if he is a dancer then he has to move his body, if he is an educator then he should look for someone to be educated, and much more.

    Self-actualization is not an easy thing to do. Because in meeting this need, an individual must get sufficient support from various parties. The impact that occurs if the needs at this final level are not met are the emergence of feelings of discomfort, anxiety, tension, inferiority, and so on.

    The Need for Self-Actualization
    The Need for Self-Actualization

    In the following, we will explain more clearly about Abraham Maslow‘s description of the need for self-actualization.

    5.1 Acceptance and Realism

    someone who manages to understand themselves and accept all the good facts about themselves, others, and their environment.

    5.2 Problem Centering

    have a person who likes to help others, can find the best solution for the problems at hand. Although the matter is beyond the control and personal environment of the individual. have the motivation to always be responsible and always prioritize social ethics.

    5.3 Spontaneity

    able to act spontaneously and can adapt to these conditions.

    5.4 Autonomy and Solitude

    have a higher level of freedom and privacy.

    5.5 Continued Freshness of Appreciation

    a person who achieves self-actualization looks at the world with a gaze full of gratitude and unstoppable admiration. They will be easy to be grateful even if they only receive or experience small things, they are also very easy to make every incident in their life as their inspiration and source of pleasure.

    5.6 Peak Experiences

    people who achieve self-actualization have their peak of pleasure which Abraham Maslow used to call joy. They will view everything that has happened to him in a positive light. Every good or bad incident is used wisely as a lesson, inspiration, experience, and strength to be better and better.

    Peak Experiences
    Peak Experiences

    In addition, according to Abraham Maslow, someone who has achieved self-actualization has several qualities that are different from other individuals. The following are the qualities of individuals who successfully achieve self-actualization, such as:

    • truth,
    • goodness,
    • beauty,
    • wholeness,
    • dichotomy,
    • aliveness,
    • unique,
    • perfection,
    • necessity,
    • completion,
    • justice,
    • orders,
    • simplicity,
    • richness,
    • effortless,
    • playfulness,
    • self-sufficiency.

    It turns out that there is a lot of information that we get in just one theory. This theory has a conclusion, essentially to achieve the highest level of needs, an individual must first meet the basic level of needs. Well, then can reach the highest level of need.

  • The Life and Legacy of Abraham Maslow: Creator of Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs Theory

    The Life and Legacy of Abraham Maslow: Creator of Maslow’s Hierarchy of Needs Theory

    Abraham Harold Maslow was the eldest of seven children. His parents were uneducated Jewish immigrants from Russia. Young Maslow first studied law at the City College of New York (CCNY), but after three semesters he moved to Cornell, and then back to CCNY.

    He earned a BA in 1930, while an MA followed in 1931, and a Ph.D in 1934; all of which he got in psychology from The University of Wisconsin. A year after graduating from his doctoral program, he returned to New York to work with EL Thorndike at Columbia, where Maslow became interested in researching human sexuality.

    Born April 1, 1908 in Brooklyn, New York, United States, he began teaching full time at Brooklyn College in 1937. During that time, he met many European intellectuals who immigrated to the United States, and Brooklyn in particular, such as Adler, Fromm, Horney, and several Gestalt and Freudian psychologists.

    Later, Maslow served as chair of the psychology department at Brandeis in the period (1951-1969). This is where Maslow began to develop ideas and create his most famous theory, namely the hierarchy of needs. Beyond air, water, food, and sex, he lays down five broader layers (ordered by importance of fulfillment): physiological needs, needs for safety and security, needs for love and belonging, needs for appreciation, and needs for self-actualization.

    Maslow’s book is easy to read and full of interesting ideas. The best known are Toward a Psychology of Being (1968), Motivation and Personality (1954 and 1970), and The Further Reaches of Human Nature (1971). In addition, there are also many articles written by Maslow, especially in the Journal of Humanistic Psychology, one of which was pioneered by Maslow himself.

    He spent his last year in California, until on June 8, 1970 he died of a heart attack from a long -standing illness.

    Abraham Maslow.jpg

    BIODATA

    • Full Name: Abraham Harold Maslow
    • Profession: Scientist
    • Place of Birth: Brooklyn, New York, United States
    • Date of Birth : Wednesday, April 1, 1908
    • Zodiac : Aries
    • Nationality: America

    EDUCATION

    • Law at City College of New York
    • Received BA in 1930, MA in 1931, and Ph.D in 1934 from the University of Wisconsin
    CAREER
    • Brooklyn College (1937)
  • Autoclave: Functions and How to Use It

    Autoclave: Functions and How to Use It

    Autoclave is a laboratory tool used to sterilize laboratory equipment after use. Do any of you often use an autoclave? In this article, we will discuss a laboratory tool called an autoclave.

    The discussion about this tool will be pretty long and complete. You are starting from the notion of the autoclave, the history autoclave, the recommendation for the autoclave for your laboratory, the function of the autoclave, the working principle of the autoclave, and using the autoclave.

    It will help you understand the autoclave tool. Please comment below for those who are more experts and know more about this tool. Let’s continue reading!

    As initial information for you, this article will contain many things related to autoclaves. Some of you may have many questions related to this tool, such as:
    1. What is an autoclave?
    2. What is the function of an autoclave?
    3. How to use the autoclave?
    4. What are autoclaves made of?
    5. Can the sterilization temperature be lowered?

    This article can help you understand the tool. Let’s continue to discuss them one by one.

    What is Autoclave?

    Autoclave is a laboratory tool used to sterilize laboratory equipment after use.

    Autoclaves, known as steam sterilizers, are typically used for healthcare or industrial applications. An autoclave is a machine that uses steam under pressure to kill harmful bacteria, viruses, fungi, and spores on items placed inside a pressure vessel.

    What is the autoclave function and its uses in the laboratory?

    Why does laboratory equipment need to be sterilized? T

    Laboratories use autoclaves to fix equipment, instruments, and infectious waste. All operators must receive training on the safe operation of the autoclave before using the equipment. Users should read and understand the owner’s manual from their particular autoclave model.

    The sterilization process has many types, such as filtration, heating, sound energy, and irradiation.

    The sterilization process using an autoclave is one of the best because it uses a heating process with a temperature made periodically in a particular time unit.

    In an easy-to-understand case like this, suppose a hospital will perform appendicitis surgery on five patients simultaneously. Every tool used to dissect the patient, scissors, knife, or tweezers (etc.) must be sterile.

    If the hospital only has two sets of surgical equipment, the equipment must be washed and sterilized before being used for the next patient. Now this sterilization process needs to be done using an autoclave. How long does this sterilization process take? Of course, each autoclave has a different period. If the sterilization process using an autoclave takes 60 minutes, then at least the period between one patient and another is 1 hour.

    different type of autoclave
    different types of autoclave

    You may also have read some understanding of autoclaves using the Google search engine.

    Wikipedia Quotes About the Definition of an Autoclave

    An autoclave is a pressure chamber used to carry out industrial and scientific processes requiring elevated temperature and pressure about ambient. Autoclaves are used in medical applications to perform sterilization, in the chemical industry to cure coatings and vulcanize rubber, and for hydrothermal synthesis. Industrial autoclaves are used in industrial applications, especially in composites manufacturing.

    From the definition of autoclaves above, we can conclude that autoclaves have different types and categories. In their current development, autoclaves are used in industry, medicine, and research.

    History of the Autoclave in the Laboratory

    In the historical process of autoclave discovery, the author did not find a source that did explain it in detail. Still, there are two names associated with the formation of the autoclave, namely:

    • Denis Papin
    • Charles Chamberland

    Denis Papin

    A man of French nationality, he was born around August 1647 and died in August 1713. Denis Papin is a physicist and mathematician; he has connections with several inventions, such as the steam digester, pressure cooker, and steam engine. And of course, we need to know autoclave has another name, steam sterilizer.

    Charles Chamberland

    He is a man of French nationality, born around March 1851 and died around May 1908. He was a microbiologist at the Jura Department. Charles did the development of a filter which is often known as the Chamberland filter. Charles made use of porcelain rods which had smaller pores than bacteria. So that when the liquid is passed through the filter, all bacteria are captured, and the drink is free from bacteria. Charles Chamberland rose to fame when he started the research project that led to the invention of the autoclave in 1879.

    From some of this information, you will understand how the relationship between the two people above relates to forming the method in the autoclave. Denis Papin will deal with pressure on the autoclave, and Charles Chamberland will deal with bacterial sterilization.

    I’d appreciate it if you could understand the working principle of the autoclave and find a common thread in its relationship with the tools invented by the two people above.

    Autoclave Function

    sterilization using autoclave

    What is the function of the autoclave? Maybe that’s the question on the reader’s mind right now. Autoclave function, in general, is for sterilization of any object being sterilized. There are several types, such as:

    • Medical equipment (medicine)
    • Laboratory equipment (research)
    • Liquid and solid media

    Sterilization using an autoclave takes advantage of the heat in the water, which is converted into water vapor. Some laboratory equipment allows the sterilization process using an autoclave, but others require a sterilization process using a different method, such as an ultrasonic cleaner.

    The function of the autoclave in the medical or medical field is still within the scope of sterilization. Some surgical tools or medical procedures commonly used include surgical scissors, tweezers, or a scalpel. Some of these tools are included in the devices that need to be sterilized using an autoclave.

    In the process of handling medical waste, the function of the autoclave also has an important role. For example: before medical waste is disposed of, there will be a sterilization process using an autoclave. This sterilization process is categorized as quite effective or alternative when compared to burning waste and impacts the environment.

    In the field of microbiology, the function of the autoclave also plays an important role. For example, in the microbial culture process, media is needed, both liquid media, semi-solid media, and solid media. Well, it’s not only first sterilization before use; after microbial observation, it is better to sterilize it before the media is disposed of as waste.

    What is the working principle of an autoclave?

    Autoclave Working Principle
    Autoclave Working Principle

    After knowing the function of the autoclave in the previous point, we now discuss the working principle of the autoclave.

    The working principle of the autoclave is straightforward: converting electrical energy into heat energy. Thermal energy is channeled into the water, the water boils and produces water vapor, and the water vapor collects and increases the pressure. Air is pushed out, and the temperature is continuously improved and controlled as needed. The heat from boiling water vapor and high pressure will be held at a particular time to kill microbes at 100 to 134°C.

    The autoclave works on the principle of moist heat sterilization. The high pressure inside the chamber increases sterilizing equipment’s boiling point. The higher pressure also ensures the rapid penetration of heat into the deeper parts of the equipment.

    What is the function of an autoclave and its operating temperature?

    Many autoclaves are used to sterilize equipment and supplies by subjecting them to pressurized saturated steam at 121 °C (250 °F) for around 30-60 minutes at a pressure of 15 psi (103 kPa or 1.02 atm), depending on the size of the load and the contents.

    In a straightforward case, the autoclave is like a rice steamer in the kitchen. I am used to steaming or heating rice. The difference is that the rice steamer uses fire as heat energy, while the laboratory autoclave uses electrical power. Some types of autoclaves that are pretty outdated may still use the stove as heating media.

    Back to the electric type autoclave with automatic mode. Oh, yes… previously, there were many types of autoclaves. Such as manual, automatic, benchtop, or even large-capacity autoclaves.

    In the relationship between autoclave  and sterilization, several things need to be considered, such as:

    • Temperature or temperature has units of degrees Celsius or Fahrenheit
    • Pressure or pressure has units of bar
    • The length of time for sterilization is in minutes
    • The drying time has units of minutes

    Several types of laboratory autoclaves are no longer manual but automatic. Automatic here refers to the cycle process according to user needs. You need to know that if the autoclave has various features, one of the features you need to know is the different treatments for sterilizing each object.

    Why is an autoclave used for sterilization?

    Autoclave sterilization uses heat to kill microorganisms such as bacteria and spores. The heat is delivered by pressurized steam. Pressurization allows the moisture to reach the high temperatures required for sterilization.

    How to Use a Laboratory Autoclave

    How to use the correct autoclave?  Maybe that is the question that is on your mind. In the following, the author provides a brief overview of how to use a laboratory autoclave correctly.

    If you have never used an autoclave in the laboratory before and this is your first time using an autoclave, try looking for work instructions or manuals for using an autoclave in the laboratory or a user manual that is always available when buying an autoclave. Because each autoclave usually has a different use procedure—for example, manual type autoclave and automatic type autoclave. Be sure to ask senior users if necessary.

    The following are step-by-step tips on how to use a standard autoclave.

    • Enter the amount of water according to the volume needed; an indicator on the reservoir can be used as an ideal benchmark because each autoclave requires a different water supply.
    • Suppose your autoclave includes a sophisticated kind of autoclave so that the indicator will only be visible when there is an electricity supply (already connected). In that case, you must first click the electricity and turn on the power button.
    • Place the liquid media, solid media, or laboratory equipment to be sterilized in the autoclave. Make sure you arrange them neatly; if there are shelves, agree them as neatly as possible, use them.
    • Close the autoclave properly and tightly, then recheck the safety clamp before sterilizing. If the safety clamp on your autoclave is a swivel nut, ensure it is tightly closed. If your safety clamp is a swivel or sliding lever, ensure it’s tightly sealed.
    • Set the time and temperature on the autoclave as needed, then press the start button. In the automatic autoclave type, you will need a cycle selection process to determine which cycle is the most appropriate for the product you will sterilize.
    • After the sterilization process ends and the temperature cools down, you can only move the product out of the autoclave.
    • Empty the autoclave of the sterilized product after each use. If it is not used for a long time, it is recommended to empty the water in the reservoir, disconnecting the autoclave from the power source.

    Here are tips on how to use an autoclave in general. Those of you who buy a new autoclave are expected to read the manual for using the autoclave, which is available on the completeness of the purchase document.

  • How Does a Blood Pressure Monitor Work? Here’s the Explanation

    How Does a Blood Pressure Monitor Work? Here’s the Explanation

    The proper scientific name for blood pressure monitoring devices is sphygmomanometer, which is generally difficult to pronounce, another name for blood pressure monitors is Blood Pressure Monitor

    For decades, doctors used a manually inflated air sac cuff and a listening device called a stethoscope to listen for the sound of the artery walls. This is known as the auscultatory method of measuring blood pressure. Using this method requires some practice and is usually done by a trained medical practitioner. This monitor is often called an aneroid sphygmomanometer.

    Blood pressure is a vital sign component. The results of blood pressure measurements affect decisions related to medical management and action.  Tools that can be used to measure blood pressure include a mercury manometer , aneroid sphygmomanometer , and digital sphygmomanometer

    aneroid sphygmomanometer
    aneroid sphygmomanometer

    Recent advances in medical technology have paved the way for inexpensive and easy-to-use digital sphygmomanometers that anyone can use in the comfort of their home without any special knowledge or training.

    The Digital Blood Pressure Monitor uses an inflatable air bag cuff, a battery powered air pump, and a pressure sensor to sense the vibrations of the artery walls to measure the blood pressure in the arteries. This is known as the oscillometric method.

    There are two types of Digital Blood Pressure Monitor namely the upper arm model (shown above) and the wrist model(shown below). Upper arm models have a cuff that sits on the upper arm and is connected by a tube to a monitor that rests on the surface near the arm. Wrist models are smaller and the entire unit wraps around the wrist. Regardless of the type of the two types of digital sphygmomanometer, the function and measurement method remains the same.

    How Do Digital Blood Pressure Monitor Work?

    The digital sphygmomanometer has an air pump driven by a microprocessor . The microprocessor will automatically pump air into the cuff about 20 mmHg above the average systolic pressure (about 120 mmHg). After the microprocessor captures sufficient pressure, the knob on the sphygmomanometer will automatically loosen and the air pressure in the cuff will decrease slowly.

    When the ordering process takes place, an oscilometric wave will appear which will be recorded by the instrument. This oscillometric wave is converted automatically by the device as systolic blood pressure, diastolic blood pressure, pulse pressure, and mean arterial pressure (MAP). The point where the oscillometric wave appears first will be read as systolic blood pressure, while the point where the oscilometric wave begins to disappear will be read as diastolic blood pressure. 

    The signal from the pressure sensor is conditioned by the instrumentation amplifier prior to data conversion by the analog-to-digital converter (ADC). The systolic pressure, diastolic pressure, and pulse rate are then calculated in the digital domain using the appropriate algorithm for the type of monitor and sensor being used. The resulting systolic, diastolic and pulse rate measurements are displayed on a liquid crystal display (LCD), added with time and stored in a non-volatile memory.

    User Interface

    Most Digital Blood Pressure Monitor use a simple monochrome LCD with 100 segments or less that can be driven by a driver integrated in the microcontroller. Backlight can be added using one or more white light emitting diodes (LEDs).

    One or more pushbuttons and/or physical switches are typically used to turn the power on and off and to initiate blood pressure measurements.

    High-end Digital Blood Pressure Monitor can use a color LCD with a touch screen to implement advanced user interfaces such as on-screen virtual buttons, touch menus, graphics, animations, etc.

    Digital Tensimeters
    Digital Blood Pressure Monitor

    Audible notifications in the Digital Blood Pressure Monitorcan be provided with a simple beep driven by one or two pins of the micro controller port which has pulse width modulation (PWM) capability. More advanced sound announcements can be achieved by adding an audio digital-to-analog converter (DAC) and amplified speakers.

    Connectivity

    In recent years, connectivity, aggregation and sharing of health data have become a trend in the consumer digital health space, especially among younger users.

    The connected Digital Blood Pressure Monitor has the ability to upload data to a computer or smartphone for further analysis and tracking of measurements over time. This data transfer is usually done via a USB interface or wirelessly using a Bluetooth Low-Energy radio link.

    Advanced Digital Blood Pressure Monitor can also use Wi-Fi and/or cellular wireless networks to upload data to a remote digital health information management system without relying on a computer or smartphone.

    Power Management

    Upper arm digital sphygmomanometers typically use four AA or AAA alkaline batteries (1.5V) and wrist monitors typically use two AAA alkaline batteries. Alternatively, high-end Digital Blood Pressure Monitor can use rechargeable Li-Ion batteries and plug-in wall chargers similar to those used for smartphones.

    To extend battery life, automatic power off after a period of inactivity can be applied. However, the real time clock (RTC) must always be turned on to maintain the current time when the monitor is turned off.

  • What is an oxygen concentrator and how does it work?

    What is an oxygen concentrator and how does it work?

    An oxygen concentrator is a type of medical device used to deliver oxygen to a person with respiratory problems. A person whose blood level is lower than normal will often need this machine to replace that oxygen. In general, it is not recommended that you use an oxygen concentrator without a doctor’s prescription. A doctor should prescribe it after the patient has completed a thorough medical evaluation. Doctors will also usually show patients how to use these concentrators effectively while traveling and at home.

    The Oxygen Concentrator filters the surrounding air, compresses it to the required density and then delivers purified medical grade oxygen into a pulse-dose delivery system or continuous-flow system to the patient. Equipped with special filters and filters that help remove Nitrogen from the air to ensure delivery of fully purified oxygen to the patient. The device is also equipped with an electronic user interface so that you can adjust the oxygen concentration level and oxygen rate setting and then the patient inhales oxygen through a nasal cannula or a special mask.

    You normally measure the Oxygen Concentrator output in LPM (liters per minute). Your doctor will determine the level of oxygen you need, which can vary at rest, during sleep, and when you exercise.

    What are the Uses and Reasons for Choosing an Oxygen Concentrator?

    What are the Uses and Reasons for Choosing an Oxygen Concentrator

    There are many reasons to choose an Oxygen Concentrator and doctors can recommend oxygen therapy to their patients for a variety of medical conditions. Normally, your lungs absorb air oxygen, transferring it to your bloodstream. If you recently had blood tests or pulse oximetry to assess your oxygen saturation level, and you find you have low blood oxygen levels, your doctor may recommend short- or long-term oxygen therapy.

    You may be wondering what oxygen concentrators are used for? Acute conditions usually require short-term oxygen therapy. This condition usually lasts a short time. They may have sudden symptoms versus a chronic condition where things happen gradually. However, some respiratory or chronic conditions require long-term oxygen supplementation.


    Acute Conditions Requiring Oxygen Concentrator

    Some examples of acute conditions where you may need an Oxygen Concentrator for short-term oxygen therapy are:

    1. Asthma / Shortness of Breath

    This condition is where your airways become inflamed and start producing a lot of mucus, which makes it harder to breathe. While there are a number of medications that can treat and control asthma, oxygen concentrators can pump high levels of oxygen into a patient’s bloodstream while they are having or have had an asthma attack.

    2. Pneumonia / Inflammation of the Lungs

    Pneumonia is an infection in which you develop inflammation of one or both of the air sacs of your lungs and in most cases, fill them with fluid. Many pneumonia patients have been prescribed oxygen therapy and have seen good clinical outcomes.

    3. Bronchopulmonary dysplasia (BPD)

    Newborns with RDS also have a higher risk of developing BPD. This is a severe lung condition that requires long-term breathing assistance.


    Chronic Diseases Requiring Oxygen Therapy

    Some chronic conditions that require long-term use of Oxygen Concentrators are:

    1. Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease (COPD)

    Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease COPD affects about 16 million people, but oxygen concentrators can be an effective treatment. When you have COPD, you have chronic lung damage that makes it difficult for your lungs to absorb enough oxygen. As a result, you may have difficulty breathing, and oxygen therapy via a concentrator can help.

    2. Cystic fibrosis

    You inherit this life-threatening condition. It causes damage to the digestive system and lungs. This is a rare condition that affects the body’s cells that are responsible for producing mucus, sweat, and digestive juices. The fluid is altered which produces a sticky, thicker solution that clogs the ducts, tubes, and passages of the infected person.

    3. Sleep Apnea

    Sleep apnea is a sleep disorder that can be serious and cause an individual’s breathing to stop sporadically and start during their sleep. Usually, treatment for this condition is continuous positive airway pressure (CPAP), weight loss and physical exercise, although some people with sleep apnea may need oxygen therapy.

    How Does an Oxygen Concentrator Work?

    The oxygen concentrator uses an intelligent method to remove nitrogen from the air and produces up to 96 percent pure oxygen. For reference, room air contains 80 percent nitrogen and 20 percent oxygen. The oxygen concentrator will change the surrounding air using one or two filters to take air from outside and then process it from the machine which will make pure oxygen ready to be inhaled by the patient.

    Think of an oxygen concentrator as a window air conditioner, so it needs air to enter, change it and give it a different form. Oxygen Concentrators take air and purify it for use by individuals who need medical oxygen due to low levels of oxygen in their blood.

    1. Compressing air while the cooling mechanism prevents the concentrator from getting hot
    2. Inhaling air from the surroundings
    3. Using electronic interfaces to adjust delivery settings
    4. Removing nitrogen from the air through filters and filters
    5. Delivering pure oxygen through a mask or nasal cannula tube

    Advantages of Oxygen Concentrator

    1. No need to refill oxygen
    2. Small size (portable) and easy to carry
    3. Safe because it doesn’t have a tank and doesn’t leak
    4. Easy to operate
    5. Lighter weight than oxygen cylinders

    Disadvantage of Oxygen Concentrator

    1. Relatively more expensive
    2. The engine may be a little louder
    3. Cannot be used if the power goes out or the battery runs out

    The oxygen concentrator machine is very suitable for home use, patients who need a continuous oxygen supply while sleeping or resting will need an oxygen concentrator according to the supplemental oxygen prescribed by the doctor. The oxygen concentrator can also be turned on for 24 hours, but you can rest the machine for about an hour. It is always recommended to have an oxygen cylinder ready as a daily backup in case the power goes out at any time. If the mains voltage is less stable, use an electric stabilizer. Keep the appliance away from cigarettes or flammable objects.

  • Tourniquet – Blood Flow Blocking Device

    Tourniquet – Blood Flow Blocking Device

    Tourniquet is a tool that functions in suppression and is used to control venous and arterial circulation in the surgical area for a certain period of time. Tourniquet serves to stop bleeding in open wounds, with the aim that the patient does not bleed out.

    A tourniquet is a first aid tool whose role is very important. The tourniquet function helps stop blood flow in open wounds. This tool that is often encountered when measuring blood pressure should only be used in emergency conditions.

    How to install and use Tourniquet

    – Cover the place where the
    tourniquet will be placed with gauze so that the skin doesn’t blister – Place the tourniquet between the wound and the heart, by tying the knot over the wound
    – tighten the bandage with a rotating stick until the bleeding stops
    – Every 10-15 minutes the tourniquet must be loosened by rotating stick in opposite direction
    – Wait – 1 minute. If within one minute the blood is no longer flowing, leave the tourniquet in a loose state.
    – If bleeding occurs again, immediately tighten the tourniquet again.

    When is the right time to use it?

    There are at least two conditions that allow the use of a tourniquet:

    • If the bleeding does not stop after pressing and lifting simultaneously
    • If it is impossible to keep the wound area under pressure

    The method of pressing and lifting the injured area should be done simultaneously whenever possible. For example, raising the hand so that it is higher than the heart while pressing with a finger or cloth.

    If the blood continues to come out after doing this, then you might consider using a tourniquet.

    In addition, if a patient has more than one open wound, a tourniquet can also be a lifesaver. Mainly, in the time span while waiting for the ambulance to arrive. Of course it will be tiring if the rescuer has to press several injured areas at once for quite a long time.

    Controversy over the use of a tourniquet

    Historically, the use of a tourniquet was first documented on the battlefield in 1674. However, there is controversy that accompanies the use of this tool.

    Complications due to the use of tourniquets are closely related to severe tissue damage. An example is the experience of war soldiers whose limbs had to be amputated. There is an assumption that this occurs because of the use of a tourniquet, but it could be due to infection.

    This tool was popularly used on the battlefield because the risk of severe bleeding from open wounds was quite high. The soldiers needed a solution to stop the bleeding as soon as possible and stay awake, even continue the war.

    Despite its popularity, the use of this tourniquet has earned a negative reputation in the emergency relief field.Meanwhile, in the context of everyday life, the use of a tourniquet is considered the last resort.

     Logically, people who are not soldiers of war are still more free to apply other measures such as pressing or raising the injured area.However, the views surrounding the tourniquet controversy have changed. Now, heavy bleeding or hemorrhage is a very serious issue. When this happens, it must be stopped immediately.

    Every second is at stake. Otherwise, the patient may die.

  • Difference Between Psychology and Sociology

    Difference Between Psychology and Sociology

    In this article we will review the Difference between Psychology and Sociology . Psychology and Sociology are two broad sciences related to the study of human beings, wherein ‘psychology’ refers to the study of the human mind, i.e. it deals with what happens inside a person’s brain, in order to understand his reasons/behavior under different circumstances. In contrast, ‘sociology’ implies the study of human behavior in a group or society and the reasons for it.

    Where psychology focuses on an individual, namely studying the individual, his behavior, thoughts, feelings and mental characteristics at a time. Sociology aims to analyze the behavior patterns of a group of people. It also studies the reasons that make them follow a particular religion, belief, culture, customs,

    So, basically, psychology is about the ‘nature’ of a person, i.e. what you were born into, whereas sociology is about ‘upbringing’, i.e. what a person was raised with. Read the article below to the end to understand the difference between psychology and sociology .

    Definition of Psychology

    Psychology can be understood as the methodical research and study of mental processes, experiences and human behavior and the relationships between them, whether real or not. It is the study of a person’s mind, such as how it functions and influences behavior.

    The term ‘psychology’ is a combination of two Greek words ‘psyche’ and ‘logos’ which mean ‘soul’ and ‘study’ respectively. In this way, psychology refers to the study of the soul. It analyzes three main aspects of human nature, namely:

    1. Experience: Some personal human experiences and privacy are studied by psychologists to understand one’s private world. This includes dreams, one’s conscious experiences at various phases of life and altered consciousness experiences, by means of medication or meditation.
    2. Mental Processing: It also studies the human mental processes in which the thoughts that occur in a person’s brain are read. In this study, a person’s internal mental activity is investigated, with their attitudes and behavior in certain situations. This includes the investigation of perception, thinking, learning and remembering, etc.
    3. Behavior: Psychology also studies a person’s behavior, which includes the analysis of basic reflexes, response patterns, and complex behaviors, either through direct observation or measurement through scientific instruments. Basically, a person’s behavior is reflected in his activities such as body language, gestures, facial expressions, when he responds to stimuli in certain situations.

    When observing a person’s behavior, psychologists try to find out the processes that influence a person’s behavior. The process is represented in the image below:

    Difference Between Psychology and Sociology

    Definition of Sociology

    Sociology can be understood as a social science that systematically studies social relations, interactions, culture and behavior of a person in society. The subject area of ​​sociology is not the individual, but seeks to look further, i.e. examine society, regarding certain associations or groups of individuals.

    The term ‘sociology’ is a combination of the Latin word ‘socius’ and the Greek word ‘logu’, meaning ‘associate or associate’ and ‘study’. So, sociology refers to the study of friendship or human relations.

    Sociology studies how people in a group interact with each other and how a person’s behavior is determined by social groups, categories, like age, class, gender, etc., and institutions, i.e. religion, caste, education, politics etc. scientific studies, as in it investigates and analyzes social reality using logical methods, considering verifiable evidence and interpretations. Furthermore, social status, movement, stratification and change, are also studied in this discipline.

    Difference Between Psychology and Sociology

    The differences between psychology and sociology discussed above can be summed up in the following points:

    • Psychology is the study of humans in relation to their experiences, mental well-being and behavioral patterns. On the other hand, sociology is the science of human association, which studies the actions of individuals in a social context.
    • Psychology is a specialized science that studies the individual mind and its functions, which direct and control behavior. Sociology is a general science in which sociologists analyze the structure of groups, societies and institutions and the way people interact.
    • When it comes to subject areas, psychology studies the human mind and behavior, whereas sociology studies the behavior of a person when he is in a group or in the midst of people.
    • In psychology, psychologists tend to examine and analyze one person at a time. In contrast, in sociology, sociologists analyze society or groups as a whole.
    • In psychology reading a person’s mind and the reasons for his behavior in a certain way is an experimental process. On the other hand, in sociology, sociologists observe the behavior of individuals in society and the way society views, beliefs and cultures, etc. Influence someone.
    • While psychology deals with human emotions, sociology deals with human interactions.
    • Psychology assumes that a person’s mental characteristics govern his behavior. In contrast, sociology assumes that individuals are significantly influenced by society, which regulates individual behavior.

    Conclusion:

    Social Psychology is a branch of psychology, which studies the impact of people on the thoughts, feelings and behavior of individuals. Psychology tends to study the individual, in terms of his mental characteristics to find out the reasons for his behavior in a certain way. On the other hand, psychology is concerned with the origin, development and structure of human society.

  • Types of Natural Resources: Examples and How to Conserve Them

    Types of Natural Resources: Examples and How to Conserve Them

    Understanding Natural Resources – Everyone knows, that everything that comes from the Earth, biosphere, and atmosphere is called natural resources. Natural resources have a very important role to meet the needs of all human life. In addition, natural resources are also important as human habitation.

    There are many types of natural resources on earth. Natural resources can be classified based on their nature, potential, and types.

    Natural Resources Based on Their Nature

    First, the types of natural resources based on their nature, natural resources are divided into:

    1. Renewable Natural Resources (Renewable Resources).

    Renewable natural resources are types of resources that depend on their management, in the sense that they depend on human use. Inventories can increase or decrease.

    If it can be managed with good utilization, then this natural resource can increase and recover and then regenerate again. However, this type of natural resource can experience a decline if its use uses excessive exploitation methods.

    Examples of renewable natural resources are water, soil, air, plants and the sun.

    a. Water

    water natural resources

    Water is the most important compound for human life on Earth. As a natural resource stored in the earth, water can be found easily from wells, rivers, lakes, to the sea. Furthermore, water is used by humans to meet their daily needs, from drinking, bathing, washing, irrigating agricultural land and plantations, generating electricity, and providing transportation.

    b. Land

    Soil is part of the earth’s crust that contains minerals and natural organic matter. Soil is formed from weathering or erosion of parent rock (inorganic) mixed with organic matter. Soil has a very vital role for human life because it functions as a support for
    plants. The soil body consists of air (20-30%), water (20-30%), mineral matter (45%), and organic matter (5%).

    The benefits of land resources for human life are:

    • Provides nutrients for plants.
    • Provide food for plant biota.
    • Become a living habitat and carry out activities.
    • Become a source of raw materials for handicrafts and household products.

    c. Air

    In addition to water and soil, air is one of the most important compounds in the survival of human life. Air has an important role because it is a mixture of various gases which are colorless, odorless and tasteless. The presence of air is only visible from objects that are moved by air. Air has an infinite nature, where air always seeks and fills space.

    The benefits of air as a natural resource are:

    • Supports flower pollination.
    • Be a source for breathing.
    • Become an airplane flight path.
    • Communication channels through antennas to satellites.
    • Motivational energy channels.

    d. Plant

    Types of Natural Resources forest
    Forest

    Plants are multicellular eukaryotic organisms that live and belong to the plant kingdom (kingdom plantae). Plants as organisms that have chlorophyll or leaf green substances that function as a medium for creating food or commonly known as the process of photosynthesis. Please note that plant species can live and carry out photosynthesis need the help of sunlight.

    Well, the benefits of plants for human life are as food ingredients, medicines, food flavoring ingredients, natural dyes, and so on.

    e. Sun

    Quoted from the California Institute of Technology, the Sun or some people call it the sun is a star consisting of hot gas with a large mass, rotating, and shining. The sun is like the stars that are visible in the sky both day and night.

    The sun has a role in life as the source of life for all creatures. As the center of the solar system, life on planet earth is strongly influenced by the sun. The sun is not a solid mass and does not have an easily identifiable boundary. That’s because almost the entire layer of the sun consists of hydrogen and helium.

    The National Aeronautics and Space Administration (NASA) as the independent agency in charge of the space program argues that without heat and sunlight, planet Earth would be an ice-covered rock ball without life. The existence of the Sun is to warm the oceans, move the atmosphere, produce weather patterns, and provide energy to green plants as a provider of food and oxygen for life on Earth.

    2. Non-Renewable Natural Resources

    These natural resources are natural resources that will physically run out and cannot be reused. Examples of non-renewable natural resources are coal, oil and natural gas.

    Non-renewable natural resources are natural resources that are limited in number. This is because the use of these natural resources is faster than the process of their formation. If consumed continuously, it is certain that these resources will run out and become extinct.

    Examples of non-renewable natural resources are:

    a. Petroleum

    Types of Natural Resources Petroleum

    Petroleum is a concentrated liquid that comes from the top layer of the Earth’s crust. In the management process using the results of various geological studies. Where the study focuses on the location of petroleum sources or commonly called petroleum wells.

    Petroleum provides tremendous benefits to mankind around the world. Referring to the opinion of Puja Laksana, petroleum comes from living beings that die then are covered by layers of soil and rocks. The living creatures that died millions of years ago are commonly known by the term fossils, which are fossils that produce petroleum or fossil fuels.

    Petroleum itself consists of a mixture of hydrogen and carbon molecules formed from sediment or deposition of the remains of animals and plants trapped for millions of years. This process occurs due to pressure and temperature in the Earth’s crust, resulting in an oil reservoir located deep below the ground surface.

    The process of reservoir formation due to a layer of hard rock called the nest rock (cap rock). Petroleum is formed as a result of hydrocarbon processes in the soil that began about three million years ago. The formation process itself occurs at a temperature of 65-195 degrees Celsius at a depth of 5,000-12,000 feet.

    It is conceivable if the world’s oil supplies run out or run out. What will happen is that petroleum cannot be renewed because the formation process takes millions of years. Therefore, crude oil is classified as a non-renewable natural resource.

    Furthermore, to be used by humans, crude oil will go through a process of separation and cracking. This separation process has the principle that crude oil which is a mixture of all components will be separated. Each component of crude oil which is still a hydrocarbon is separated based on differences in boiling points.

    Here are the benefits of petroleum that have been felt by humans:

    • Be the fuel for cooking.
    • Become a source of fuel for transportation.
    • The basic ingredients for the manufacture or synthesis of compounds in paint, cosmetics, plastics, rubber, detergents, and so on.
    • Being a lubricant or oil in various vehicle engines.
    • Materials to make candles to produce batik, paper coatings for food, and so on.
    • Ignition fuel in large industries, such as Steam Power Plants.
    • The basic material for asphalt used in road construction, besides that it can also be used as an insulator.

    b. Coal

    coal

    Apart from oil, coal is also a fossil fuel. This makes coal a non-renewable natural resource. Coal is an organic sedimentary solid hydrocarbon fuel formed from the biochemical, chemical and physical decomposition of plants in oxygen-free conditions. The process of decaying plants takes place at certain pressures and temperatures for a very long time. This is what makes coal a complex mixture because it contains organic chemicals from carbon, oxygen, and hydrogen in one carbon chain.

    The definition of coal has actually been stated in Law no. 3 of 2020 concerning Amendments to Law Number 4 of 2009 concerning Mineral and Coal Mining. Coal is a naturally occurring deposit of carbonaceous organic compounds from plant residues. Quoted from the Indonesian Ministry of Energy and Mineral Resources in a press release number 246.Pers/04/SJI/2021, Indonesia’s coal reserves in 2021 will reach 38.84 billion tons.

    With an average coal production of 600 million tons per year. The supply of coal reserves in Indonesia is sufficient to last up to 65 years. In addition to coal reserves, Indonesia is noted to still have large coal resources of 143.7 billion tons.

    In the book “Coal and Its Utilization” published by Gadjah Mada University Press, the use of coal in Indonesia is prioritized as fuel for power plants and cement factories. Starting from 1993, Indonesia took steps to provide socialization related to the use of coal in the community as a household material and small industry.

    The benefits of coal include:

    • Become fuel for power generation.
    • The basic and main fuel for steel production, cement, alumina processing centers, paper mills, chemical and pharmaceutical industries.
    • Coal by-products include soap, aspirin, solvents, dyes, plastics, and fiber.

    c. Gold

    gold

    Gold has a very long history in the history of mankind. Gold is a valuable object because it can be used as a medium of exchange or as an investment asset. Gold itself is actually a chemical element in the periodic table that has the symbol Au (aurum) and atomic number 79. Chemically, gold is not only a good conductor of heat and electricity. Gold is also resistant to rust and corrosion because it is not oxidized with oxygen.

    This metal is soft and malleable so it is easy to shape. Its hardness, which only ranges from 2.5-3 on the Mohs scale, makes gold can be used as jewelry in various forms. According to a publication from the American Museum of Natural History, gold is formed as a result of deposits in fractured rock commonly called lodes, or veins.

    Just like oil and coal, gold also comes from within the Earth’s crust. Most seam deposits form when heated liquid circulates through gold-bearing rock, picking up the gold and concentrating it in new locations on the crust.

    Over millions of years, gold flakes are washed away with the water. Heavy gold settles on the bottom of rivers, lakes, and seas by forming placer deposits. In most of the Earth’s crust the concentration of gold is very low. On average, one tonne of rock from the crust contains 0.005 grams of gold, compared to 58,000 grams of iron.

    In everyday human life, gold provides benefits as a jewelry material and a commodity that has high economic value. The rare and limited nature of gold makes gold have an expensive price. In addition, the high price of gold is due to the high cost of producing it. As a result, until now the price of gold always rises because the demand also increases.

    Types of Natural Resources Based on Their Potential Use

    After understanding the meaning and types of natural resources by type. Next, we will discuss natural resources based on their potential use. There are three types of natural resources based on their potential use, namely:

    1. Material natural resources. This type of natural resource is only used in its physical form.
    Examples of material natural resources: iron, wood, cotton fiber, and gold.
    2. Natural resources of energy. This type of natural resource is used by utilizing its usefulness value as energy.
    Examples of natural energy resources: oil, natural gas, waterfalls, and sunlight.
    3. Natural resources of space. This type of natural resource is used for living or living space.

    Types of Natural Resources Based on Kinds

    Next are the types of natural resources based on the type, the types of natural resources are divided into two:

    1. Non-biological (abiotic) natural resources.

    These natural resources are inanimate resources. Examples can be found in our daily life, such as soil, rock, water, and wind.

    rock mines

    2. Biological natural resources (biotic).

    Natural resources are natural resources in the form of living things. Examples of biological natural resources are humans, animals and plants.

    How to Conserve Natural Resources

    Behind the enormous utilization and use, humans also have demands and obligations to participate in conserving the natural resources that exist on Earth. The real purpose of preserving natural resources is so that the next generation of humans can still experience the same benefits from natural resources as the Earth’s wealth in the future.

    Nature conservation is a principle in managing natural resources. Sustainable development (sustainable development) is one form of nature conservation is being echoed. Sustainable development is development that is carried out while meeting the needs of the present without compromising the ability of natural resources to meet the needs of future generations.

    The following are the principles of sustainable development:

    1. Equity

    Equitable distribution of natural resources is considered to be one of the ways that can prevent inequality in society and allow every human being to have equal access to the results of natural resources. This equity aims to ensure that each region can obtain a balanced development.

    2. Energy

    Energy as the key to the rapid development of human civilization needs attention. This is because the energy used on a large and massive scale can make energy from natural resources depleted and slowly depleted. Energy saving is one of the keys in conserving natural resources. Slowly, humans must immediately let go of dependence on non-renewable energy.

    power plant

    Humans must immediately switch to using renewable energy sources produced from renewable natural resources. Energy savings can be adapted for all types of natural resources by not using them in vain or looking for other alternatives to replace them. One of the definite steps to save energy that is currently being carried out is the use of sunlight as natural lighting and environmentally friendly electricity.

    3. Economy

    Economic principles that can support the preservation of natural resources are economic activities that are able to increase competitive capacity and development of basic infrastructure, such as housing, routes, to information infrastructure.

    4. Participation

    Without joint steps, the preservation of natural resources will not have a significant impact. Therefore, the principle of participation is the implementation of sustainable development that actively involves the community.

    5. Ecology

    Utilization of mixed land as much as possible is one strategy that can be done, in terms of ecology. As is now often done, namely the provision of Green Open Space (RTH), limiting excessive city expansion, and so on.

    Environmental problems can be caused by two factors, namely humans and nature. The human factor is the main cause of the many environmental problems that occur.

  • 11 Types of Music Genres In The World

    11 Types of Music Genres In The World

    At this time, music has become a symbol of the human mood, again confusing those who listen to sad music, while again happy listening to music that suits his heart’s content.

    Music is a complicated part of everyday life to separate from the human being. When you wake up, sometimes in the bathroom, when working, when your boyfriend decides, even your cell phone ringtones use music. Music is a part of us.

    Well, there are many music genres that we must know, which can be seen from each genre’s characteristics.

    Definition of Music

    Before understanding music genres and the various genres of music that exist today, let’s first discuss the meaning of music. Music contains rhythm, song, and harmony obtained through the arrangement of tones or sounds in such a way.

    “Music”  originally came from the Greek word “music.” Musik comes from the phrase muse-muse, which means the nine Greek gods under the god Apollo, the protector of art and science.

    The art of music is considered something that produces a work of art, which in this case is a sound that is a song-shaped composition, an outpouring of the creator’s thoughts and feelings by combining the music’s main elements. There is rhythm, harmony, melody, and form or arrangement of songs. , expression, and feeling as a whole.

    Music is an exciting thing to learn and even hear daily. Listening to music makes life more colorful. Well, know it or not, you guys, there is a classification based on the characteristics inherent in the music, usually called the genre of music. In this article, we will discuss the understanding of music genres in more depth and understand what music genres exist today.

    Understanding Music Genres

    After understanding music, then we will understand the genre of music and any genre of music that exists. You must be very curious about what the genres of music are.

    Before that, we must first understand the meaning of the genre of music. A music genre is defined as a classification of music based on their similarity to each other. This classification can also be adjusted to different criteria, such as geographical similarity.

    Musical techniques, contexts, styles, and musical themes can serve as a definitive reference in a musical genre. The genre of music cannot be clearly defined because when the genre is characterized by a person, then that person defines it without looking at aspects from the other side. In fact, sometimes, in a song, there are two genres in it, but it is only defined as one genre only.

    Types of Music Genres

    After understanding the meaning of the genre of music, we will further understand the various genres of music and the history of the genre was born, namely:

    1. Jazz Music Genre

    Modern Jazz Quartet - Concert in Jazz (full album) HQ - YouTube

    The jazz music genre is considered a type of music that emerged due to the incorporation of other music genres, namely blues, ragtime, and European music, including band music.

    Given the understanding of music genres earlier, if there are basically several genres of music in a song, that is eventually made into a genre. There are several sub-genres in the jazz music genre; those subgenres include Dixieland, bebop, cool jazz, swing, hard bop, free jazz, fusion jazz, cafjazz, and smooth jazz.

    Musical instruments commonly used in this genre of music are trombone, trumpet, piano, saxophone, and guitar. Sometimes not everyone can enjoy this genre of jazz music. In the use of tones, the tones of this genre are very unique and have a distinctive feature in the musical game.

    2. Blues Music Genre

    Nights In White Satin (Days Of Future Passed Live) - YouTube

    The genre of blues music genre originated in the United States, both vocal and instrumental music. It emerged from praise and spiritual music, which initially appeared from the community of formerly enslaved Africans in the United States.

    This is evidenced by the use of song lyrics and the use of blue notes and the application in the pattern of call and response (in this case, there are two sentences sung by two people in succession, and in the second sentence, considered as “answer” to “question” in the first sentence).

    3. Country Music Genre

    George Strait - God And Country Music (Live From The 54th ACM Awards) -  YouTube

    The country music genre is a genre of mixed elements of American music, which is a combination of the Appalachian Mountains and the southern United States. The music has a cheerful tone and a relaxed and light disposition.

    This country music originally came from North American folk songs, gospel music, and kelt music, and it has evolved since the 1920s. Around the 1940s, the term country music began to be used, replacing the term hillbilly music, which, in a sense, seemed degrading.

    Then in the 1970s, the term became popular. There are other terms for this genre of music, namely country and western, but they are rarely used, except in Ireland and the United Kingdom. Famous artists who use this country genre is Taylor Swift, for example, with the title song Red.

    4. Techno Music Genre or EDM

    HARDWELL LIVE @ ULTRA MUSIC FESTIVAL MIAMI 2023 - YouTube

    This one music genre is a genre of music whose music streams usually use futuristic themes. Nightclubs usually use these genres of music, and usually, the music is played by a DJ (disc jockey).

    Using digital musical instruments such as DJ Maker, which is always used to me remix existing music into music that has a futuristic theme. Due to the use of digital musical instruments, this genre of music cannot be played by traditional musical instruments, such as guitars, Zalando, or drums. The music group that uses this genre of music is Daft Punk.

    5. Reggae Music Genre

    The Wailers Live @ Reggae Rotterdam Festival 2019 - YouTube

    Reggae music became a genre of music that was first developed in Jamaica around the end of the 60s. Usually, this naming is used more widely to name all types of music that exist in Jamaica.

    This reggae music is based on an accent on syncopation or off-beat to characterize a rhythmic style of music; this is called skank. See, this reggae music usually takes longer. Here are the Reggae musicians: Jimmy Cliff and Bob Marley.

    6. R&B Music Genre

    Live Retro Soul Music & Old School R&B: D-Soul Davis - YouTube

    In the genre of R&B music, it became popular because it merged with several other music genres, such as jazz, blues, and gospel. It was introduced initially by musicians of African-American descent.

    Well, R&B music is an abbreviation of Rhythm and Blues. The artist who uses the R&B music genre is Justin Timberlake. Well, the song with R&B music that writers often hear today is At My Worst by Pink Sweats.

    7. Rap ​​Music Genre

    THE MOST LIT LIVE SHOWS & CONCERTS COMPILATION (Ft. Travis Scott, Lil Uzi  Vert, XXXTentacion...) - YouTube

    Rap music has become one of the elements of hip-hop music. If you usually listen to this genre, usually the vocal technique used is to speak fast. Singers of this genre are known as rappers.

    Rap is usually accompanied by music by a band or DJ. The rapper is also included in the regular singers who sing solo; the rappers are Xzibit and Jay-z. In addition, there are rappers who are members of a band, for example, Linkin Park.

    8. Death Metal Music Genre

    DEATHSTARS - Metal (OFFICIAL MUSIC VIDEO) - YouTube

    Death metal music, this genre is a subgenre of heavy metal music that initially evolved from thrash metal in the early 1980s. The typical style of this genre of music is in the lyrics, which are generally themed on death or violence. The band that uses this genre of death metal music is The Berzerker.

    The following is a list of bands and musicians in the metal genre:

    • Metalica
    • Avenged Sevenfold
    • Rash
    • Slayer
    • Diamond Head

    9. Dangdut Music Genre

    Didi Kempot, campursari legend and Indonesia's 'Godfather of the Broken  Heart,' dies at 53 | Coconuts

    When you hear the term “dangdut,” you must be very familiar with this genre of music. Dangdut is one of the most popular music genres in Indonesia. The hallmark of this music is the playing of drums or tabla instruments.

    If you listen to this one genre of music, you must be familiar with Bollywood music because, basically, dangdut music is influenced by Classical Indian music and Bollywood.

    In addition, if viewed from the original elements of the musical style, dangdut is a combination of Malay, Hindustani, and Arabic parts. Considering that dangdut music is a blend of aspects of Arabic music as well, this is seen from the crookedness and harmonization of the tone.

    The beginning of presence of dangdut music began in the 1960s; this accompanied the popularity of Bollywood films in the 1950s. In fact, it is also rooted in the existence of Malay music in the 1940s.

    Well, in 1968, Rhoma Irama was one of the pioneers of dangdut music in Indonesia. Beginning in the 1970s, dangdut music became widely popular in Indonesia. Even in the 1970s to 1980s, this genre of music became a genre of prima donna music that is loved by people in Indonesia.

    The term dangdut is actually an onomatopoeia, which comes from a drum or tabla that is usually filled with the sounds of dang and nut. And in further development, it is called dangdut. The artist who uses this genre of music is Rhoma Irama, who has the nickname of the King of Dangdut, and Elvy Sukaesih, who is nicknamed the Queen of Dangdut in Indonesia.

    10. Pop Music Genre

    A K-Pop Concert Movie Is Coming to YouTube – Rolling Stone

    Well, the following genre of music is the genre of pop music. Pop music tones and lyrics are made to be simple and related to everyday life. Therefore, the theme of this genre is easier to digest and, straightforward to sing, even easy to memorize the lyrics. This genre has become a universal genre of music because it can be accepted by people well.

    This genre of music is also called a popular music genre and originated in more modern forms that existed in the United Kingdom and the United States since the mid-1950s. The limitation of this genre is to refer to music that has tremendous appeal, given that the term music genre is a popular music genre.

    11. Ballad Music Genre

    John Mayer - Last Train Home (Ballad Version - Official Video) - YouTube

    There is a genre of ballad music, which is a type of music that harmonizes the song slowly, and usually, the themes used are themes about love.

    Use poetic lyrics and use slow music. Specifically in the grouping of genres, ballads have unique characteristics, namely the presence of poetry and melancholy songs. This genre comes as a slow form of popular love songs.

    Ballad music itself, the term is taken from the English language, namely “ballad,” which has the meaning of music in the form of narrative. It began popular in the Middle Ages to the 19th century, then spread throughout Europe and then America, Australia, and North Africa. A song that is perfect for those who are in love or heartbroken!

    12. Classical Music Genres

    Classical Concerts - Live Classical Music | HalidonMusic - YouTube

    This genre of music is defined as a type of music that is intellectual and beautiful and can be enjoyed by almost any age. It initially originated in Europe during the years 1750 to 1825. Usually, in this classical music, there is a division based on a specific period.

    More precisely, there is a division into three eras. Namely, there is Medieval and Renaissance, there is Classical and Romantic Baroque, and there is Modern and Contemporary. From this division, there are several musicians from the genre of classical music that are famous to date, among them, namely:

    • Mozart
    • Johann Pachelbel
    • Chopin
    • Beethoven
    • and others.

    Of the four musicians mentioned by the author above, the most famous and popular is Johann Pachelbel. Maybe his name is entirely foreign to our ears, but his work entitled  “Canon in D”  may be some who are familiar with his song.

    This classical music is an inspiration for the music and musicians that are emerging today. Classical music is a piece of soothing music; the serenity brought in this genre brings many benefits to human beings.

    Even according to research, classical music has many benefits, one of which is to minimize hypertension and calm emotions.

    Some examples of classical music genres are Symphony 40, Piano Sonata No. 16, which is a work of Mozart, and Moonlight Sonata by Beethoven. Mozart, one of the classical music musicians who has a big name and is recognized around the world, has a life story behind his success.

    The next musician, Beethoven, was the next famous classical musician; in his life had difficulties and problems with his hearing, but that did not prevent his work from being successful. Beethoven’s book by Edmund Morris tells the life journey of this world’s classical musician.

    Well, that’s some music genre that exists in the world, along with examples of singers and songs. Each of these genres has its own patterns and characteristics, even the history of the formation of different music genres.

    However, these music genres have one purpose, which is to entertain the listener. So, after understanding each of the existing music genres, which is your favorite music genre?